ERserver
iSeries
Operating System/400 Commands
Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Version 5 Release 3


ERserver
iSeries
Operating System/400 Commands
Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Version 5 Release 3
 Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the information in
“Notices,” on page 269.

First Edition (May 2004)

This edition applies to version 5, release 3, modification 0 of Operating System/400 (product number 5722-SS1) and
to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions. This version does not run on
all reduced instruction set computer (RISC) models nor does it run on CICS models.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1998, 2004. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Work with Authority (WRKAUT) . . . . 1 Work with Chart Formats
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (WRKCHTFMT) . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chart format (CHTFMT) . . . . . . . . . . 21
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Work with Authorization Lists
(WRKAUTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Work with Classes (WRKCLS) . . . . . 23
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Authorization list (AUTL) . . . . . . . . . . 5 Class (CLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Work with Binding Directories Work with Commands (WRKCMD) . . . 25

(WRKBNDDIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Command (CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Binding directory (BNDDIR) . . . . . . . . . 7 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Work with Commitment Def
Work with Binding Dir Entries (WRKCMTDFN) . . . . . . . . . . . 27
(WRKBNDDIRE) . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Binding directory (BNDDIR) . . . . . . . . . 9 Status (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ASP group (ASP Group) . . . . . . . . . . 29
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Logical unit of work ID (LUWID) . . . . . . . 29
Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Work with BOOTP table (WRKBPTBL) 11 Duplicate job option (DUPJOBOPT) . . . . . . 30
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Work with Connection Lists
Work with Configuration Lists (WRKCNNL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
(WRKCFGL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connection list (CNNL) . . . . . . . . . . 33
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configuration list (CFGL). . . . . . . . . . 13
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Work with Contact Information
Work with Configuration Status (WRKCNTINF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
(WRKCFGSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Type (CFGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Configuration description (CFGD) . . . . . . . 16
Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Work with COS Descriptions
Remote location (RMTLOCNAME) . . . . . . 18 (WRKCOSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Range (RANGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Status (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Class-of-service description (COSD) . . . . . . 37
Assistance level (ASTLVL) . . . . . . . . . 19 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Work Comm Side Information
(WRKCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 iii
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Type of shadow system (TYPE) . . . . . . . . 61
Side information (CSI) . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Work with Documents (WRKDOC) . . . 63
Work with Ctl Descriptions (WRKCTLD) 41 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Document (DOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Controller description (CTLD) . . . . . . . . 41 Folder (FLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Work with DB Files using IDDU Work with Document Libraries

(WRKDBFIDD) . . . . . . . . . . . 43 (WRKDOCLIB) . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Library (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Work with Document Print Queue
Work with DDM Files (WRKDDMF) . . . 45 (WRKDOCPRTQ) . . . . . . . . . . 67
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
File (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Work with DSNX/PC Queues
(WRKDPCQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Work with Device Descriptions Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
(WRKDEVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Distribution queue (PCNODE) . . . . . . . . 69
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Device description (DEVD) . . . . . . . . . 49 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Remote location (RMTLOCNAME) . . . . . . 50 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) 71
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Work with Device Tables Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
(WRKDEVTBL) . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Reset status statistics (RESET) . . . . . . . . 71
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Device table (DEVTBL) . . . . . . . . . . 53 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Text ’description’ (TEXT) . . . . . . . . . . 53
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Work with Distribution Lists
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 (WRKDSTL). . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Work with Directory Entries (WRKDIRE) 55 List identifier (LSTID) . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Command character identifier (CMDCHRID) . . . 74
User identifier (USRID) . . . . . . . . . . 55 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
User profile (USER). . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Command character identifier (CMDCHRID) . . . 56
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Work with Distribution Queue
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
(WRKDSTQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Work with Directory Locations Distribution (QUEUE) . . . . . . . . . . . 77
(WRKDIRLOC) . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Work with Data Areas (WRKDTAARA) 81
Work with Dir Shadow Systems Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
(WRKDIRSHD) . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Data area (DTAARA) . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

iv iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Font resource (FNTRSC) . . . . . . . . . . 101
Work with Data Dictionaries Object attribute (OBJATR) . . . . . . . . . 102
(WRKDTADCT) . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Work with Form Definitions
(WRKFORMDF) . . . . . . . . . . 105
Work with Data Definitions Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
(WRKDTADFN) . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Form definition (FORMDF) . . . . . . . . . 105
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Data dictionary (DTADCT) . . . . . . . . . 85
Definition type (DFNTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 85
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Work with Filters (WRKFTR) . . . . . 107
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Filter (FILTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Work with Data Queues (WRKDTAQ) 87 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Data queue (DTAQ) . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Work with Ftr Action Entry
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 (WRKFTRACNE) . . . . . . . . . . 111
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Work with Edit Descriptions Filter (FILTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
(WRKEDTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Edit description (EDTD) . . . . . . . . . . 89
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Work with Ftr Selection Entry
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 (WRKFTRSLTE) . . . . . . . . . . 113
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Work with Environment Var Filter (FILTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
(WRKENVVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Level of the environment variable. (LEVEL) . . . 91
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Work with Graphics Symbol Sets
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 (WRKGSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Work with Files (WRKF) . . . . . . . 93 Graphics symbol set (GSS) . . . . . . . . . 115
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
File (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
File attributes (FILEATR) . . . . . . . . . . 94
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Work with Hardware Products
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 (WRKHDWPRD) . . . . . . . . . . 117
Error messages for WRKHDWPRD . . . . . . 117
Work with Function Usage Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
(WRKFCNUSG) . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Function ID (FCNID) . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Work with Hardware Resources
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 (WRKHDWRSC) . . . . . . . . . . 119
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Work with Folders (WRKFLR) . . . . . 99 Type (TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Line type (LINETYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 120
Folder (FLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Work with Held Optical Files
Work with Font Resources (WRKHLDOPTF) . . . . . . . . . . 121
(WRKFNTRSC) . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Contents v
Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 121 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Work with Journal (WRKJRN) . . . . 145
Work with Image Catalogs Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
(WRKIMGCLG) . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Image catalog (IMGCLG) . . . . . . . . . 123
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Work with Journal Attributes
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 (WRKJRNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Work with Catalog Entries Journal (JRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
(WRKIMGCLGE) . . . . . . . . . . 125 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Journal identification number (JRNID) . . . . . 148
Image catalog (IMGCLG) . . . . . . . . . 125 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Work with Journal Receivers
Work with IPX Descriptions (WRKJRNRCV) . . . . . . . . . . . 151
(WRKIPXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Journal receiver (JRNRCV) . . . . . . . . . 151
IPX description (IPXD) . . . . . . . . . . 127 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Work With LAN Adapters
Work with Job (WRKJOB) . . . . . . 129 (WRKLANADPT) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Line description (LINE) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Option (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Duplicate job option (DUPJOBOPT) . . . . . . 132 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Work with Libraries (WRKLIB) . . . . 155
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Work with Job Descriptions Library (LIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
(WRKJOBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ASP number (ASP) . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 156
Job description (JOBD) . . . . . . . . . . 135 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Work with License Information
Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) 137 (WRKLICINF) . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Product identifier (PRDID) . . . . . . . . . 159
Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Work with Job Schedule Entries Work with Line Descriptions

(WRKJOBSCDE) . . . . . . . . . . 141 (WRKLIND) . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Job name (JOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Line description (LIND) . . . . . . . . . . 161
Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Print format (PRTFMT) . . . . . . . . . . 142 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Sequence (SEQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Scheduled by user (SCDBY) . . . . . . . . 142 Work with Object Links (WRKLNK) 163
Submit date (SBMDATE) . . . . . . . . . 143 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Job queue (JOBQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

vi iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Object type (OBJTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 164 Work with Message Files (WRKMSGF) 185
Detail (DETAIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Display option (DSPOPT) . . . . . . . . . 165 Message file (MSGF) . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Work with MLB Resource Queue Work with Message Queues

(WRKMLBRSCQ) . . . . . . . . . . 167 (WRKMSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Library device (MLB) . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Message queue (MSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . 187
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Work with Media Library Status Work With Nickname (WRKNCK) . . . 189
(WRKMLBSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Access (ACCESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Library (MLB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Resource name (RSRCNAME) . . . . . . . . 170 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Work with Network Files (WRKNETF) 191
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Work with Menus (WRKMNU) . . . . 171 User (USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Menu (MENU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 File to receive output (OUTFILE) . . . . . . . 192
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Member to receive output (OUTMBR) . . . . . 192
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Work with Module (WRKMOD) . . . . 173
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Work with Network Job Entries
Module (MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . 173 (WRKNETJOBE) . . . . . . . . . . 195
Module attribute (MODATR) . . . . . . . . 174 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Work with Mode Descriptions
(WRKMODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Work with Network Table Entry
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 (WRKNETTBLE) . . . . . . . . . . 197
Mode description (MODD) . . . . . . . . . 177 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Network (NETWORK) . . . . . . . . . . 197
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Work with Messages (WRKMSG) . . . 179 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Message queue (MSGQ) . . . . . . . . . . 179 Work with Node List (WRKNODL) . . . 199
Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Message type (MSGTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 180 Node list (NODL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Severity code filter (SEV) . . . . . . . . . 181 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Assistance level (ASTLVL) . . . . . . . . . 181 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Work with Node List Entries
(WRKNODLE) . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Work with Message Descriptions Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
(WRKMSGD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Node list (NODL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Address type (ADRTYPE) . . . . . . . . . 201
Message identifier (MSGID) . . . . . . . . 183 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Message file (MSGF) . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Contents vii
Work with NetBIOS Descriptions Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
(WRKNTBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Work with NWS Storage Spaces
NetBIOS description (NTBD) . . . . . . . . 205 (WRKNWSSTG) . . . . . . . . . . 221
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Network server storage space (NWSSTG) . . . . 221
Network server description (NWSD) . . . . . 221
Work with NetWare Aut Entries Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
(WRKNTWAUTE) . . . . . . . . . . 207 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Server type (SVRTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 207 Work with NWS Status
NDS tree (NDSTREE) . . . . . . . . . . 207 (WRKNWSSTS) . . . . . . . . . . 223
Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
User profile (USRPRF) . . . . . . . . . . 208 Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Server type (SVRTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 223
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Work with NetWare Connections
(WRKNTWCNN) . . . . . . . . . . 209 Work with Objects (WRKOBJ) . . . . 225
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Category (CGY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Object type (OBJTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 226
User profile (USRPRF) . . . . . . . . . . 210 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Work with Object Locks
Work with NetWare Volumes (WRKOBJLCK) . . . . . . . . . . . 229
(WRKNTWVOL) . . . . . . . . . . 211 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Object (OBJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Object type (OBJTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 230
Volume (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Member (MBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ASP device (ASPDEV) . . . . . . . . . . 231
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Work with Network Interfaces Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
(WRKNWID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Work with Objects by Owner
Network interface description (NWID) . . . . . 213 (WRKOBJOWN) . . . . . . . . . . 235
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 User profile (USRPRF) . . . . . . . . . . 235
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Work with Network Servers Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
(WRKNWSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Work Objects by Primary Group
Network server description (NWSD) . . . . . 215 (WRKOBJPGP) . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Primary group (PGP) . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Work with NWS User Enrollment Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
(WRKNWSENR) . . . . . . . . . . 217
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Work with OptiConnect Activity
User profile (USRPRF) . . . . . . . . . . 217 (WRKOPCACT) . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Profile type (PRFTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 218 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Server type (SVRTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . 218 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
NDS tree (NDSTREE) . . . . . . . . . . 218 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Server (SERVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Domain (DOMAIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Work with Optical Directories
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 (WRKOPTDIR) . . . . . . . . . . . 241
viii iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Optical directory (DIR) . . . . . . . . . . 241 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 242
Sort by (SORT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Work with Output Queue (WRKOUTQ) 259
Select directory level (SLTLVL) . . . . . . . 242 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Starting date (STRDATE) . . . . . . . . . 242 Output queue (OUTQ) . . . . . . . . . . 259
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Work with Optical Files (WRKOPTF) 245
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Work with OUTQ Description
Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 246 (WRKOUTQD) . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Directory (DIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
File (FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Output queue (OUTQ) . . . . . . . . . . 263
Select files (SLTFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Output (OUTPUT). . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Select date (SLTDATE) . . . . . . . . . . 247
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Work with Overlays (WRKOVL) . . . . 265

Work with Optical Volumes
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
(WRKOPTVOL) . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Overlay (OVL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Optical device (DEV) . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Volume identifier (VOL) . . . . . . . . . . 251
Side information (CSI) . . . . . . . . . . 252
Work with Page Definitions
Retrieve extended information (RTVEXTINFO) . . 252
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 (WRKPAGDFN) . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Page definition (PAGDFN) . . . . . . . . . 267
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Work with Order Information
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
(WRKORDINF) . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Appendix. Notices . . . . . . . . . 269
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Terms and conditions for downloading and
printing publications . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Work with Order Requests Code disclaimer information . . . . . . . . 271
(WRKORDRQS) . . . . . . . . . . 257
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Contents ix
x iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Authority (WRKAUT)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Authority (WRKAUT) command shows the list of authorized users of an object and their
associated authorities. From the list, you can select from options to perform the following:
v Add a user
v Change user authority
v Remove a user

The following are displayed for the specified object:

v The object path name
v The name of the object’s owner
v The name of the object’s primary group
v A list of all the users who are authorized to use the object
v The authorities that each user has for the object

If an object does not have an owner name associated with it, no authorities for the object are shown.

See Appendix D of the iSeries Security Reference, SC41-5302 for the authorities needed to use this
command.

For more information about integrated file system commands, see the Integrated file system information
in the iSeries Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OBJ Object Path name Required,
Positional 1

Top

Object (OBJ)
This is a required parameter.

The path name of the object for which the authorized users and their authorities are to be shown.

For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in ″CL concepts and
reference″ in the CL concepts and reference topic in the iSeries Information Center at
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 1

Examples
WRKAUT OBJ(’/QSYS.LIB/ARLIB.LIB/PROG1.PGM’)

This command causes the list of authorized users and their authorities for the object named PROG1 to be
shown. PROG1 is a program located in the library named ARLIB.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPDA080
User profile name too long.
CPE3101
A non-recoverable I/O error occurred.
CPE3408
The address used for an argument was not correct.
CPE3418
Possible APAR condition or hardware failure.
CPE3474
Unknown system state.
CPFA0AA
Error occurred while attempting to obtain space.
CPFA0AB
Operation failed for object. Object is &1.
CPFA0AD
Function not supported by file system.
CPFA0A1
An input or output error occurred.
CPFA0A2
Information passed to this operation was not valid.
CPFA0A3
Path name resolution causes looping.
CPFA0A4
Too many open files for process.
CPFA0A5
Too many open files.
CPFA0A7
Path name too long.
CPFA0A9
Object not found. Object is &1.
CPFA0B1
Requested operation not allowed. Access problem.
CPFA0C0
Buffer overflow occurred.

2 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPFA0C1
CCSID &1 not valid.
CPFA08B
Path name cannot begin with *.
CPFA08C
Pattern not allowed in path name directory.
CPFA08E
More than one name matches pattern.
CPFA085
Home directory not found for user &1.
CPFA086
Matching quote not found in path name.
CPFA087
Path name contains null character.
CPFA088
Path name pattern not valid.
CPFA09C
Not authorized to object. Object is &1.
CPFA09D
Error occurred in program &1.
CPFA09E
Object in use. Object is &1.
CPFA09F
Object damaged. Object is &1.
CPFA091
Pattern not allowed in user name.
CPFA092
Path name not converted.
CPFA093
Name matching pattern not found.
CPFA094
Path name not specified.
CPF1F05
Directory handle not valid.
CPF1F41
Severe error occurred while addressing parameter list.
CPF1F4A
Value for number of directory entries not valid.
CPF1F53
Value for length of data buffer not valid.
CPF2203
User profile &1 not correct.
CPF2225
Not able to allocate internal system object.

Work with Authority (WRKAUT) 3

CPF22F0
Unexpected errors occurred during processing.
CPF9801
Object &2 in library &3 not found.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
Top

4 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Authorization Lists (WRKAUTL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Authorization Lists (WRKAUTL) command allows you to show a list of authorization lists
from which you can display and change authorization lists.

Restrictions:
v Only the authorization lists to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the authorization lists, you must have use (*USE) authority to the command
used by the operation, and the appropriate authority to the authorization list on which the operation is
to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
AUTL Authorization list Qualifier list Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Authorization Generic name, name, *ALL
list

Top

Authorization list (AUTL)

Specifies the authorization lists to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

*ALL A list of all the authorization lists that you own or have authority to view is shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the authorization lists to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all authorization lists that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
shown.
name Specify the name of the authorization list to be shown.
Top

Examples
WRKAUTL AUTL(FR*)

This command allows you to work with a list of all the authorization lists that begin with ’FR’ that you
have authority to see.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 5

 Top

Error messages
None
Top

6 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Binding Directories (WRKBNDDIR)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Binding Directory (WRKBNDDIR) command allows you to display and work with a list
of binding directories.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority are searched.
v Only the binding directories to which you have some authority are shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the binding directories, you must have *USE authority to the command and
the appropriate authority to the binding directory on which the operation is performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
BNDDIR Binding directory Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Binding Generic name, name, *ALL
directory
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Binding directory (BNDDIR)

Specifies the binding directory to work with.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Binding directory

*ALL Find all binding directories in the specified library or libraries.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the binding directories. A generic name is a character string of one or
more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. If a generic name is specified,
then all binding directory objects with names that begin with the generic name, and for which the
user has authority, are shown. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the
system assumes it to be the complete object name.
name Specify the name of the binding directory to work with.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 7

*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the
job, the QGPL library is used.
*USRLIBL
Only the libraries in the user portion of the job’s library list are searched.
*ALL All libraries in the system portion of the job’s library list, including QSYS, are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKBNDDIR BNDDIR(HOLDER)

This command allows you to work with a binding directory named HOLDER.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF5D0B
Binding directory &1 was not created
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

8 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Binding Dir Entries (WRKBNDDIRE)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Binding Directory Entries (WRKBNDDIRE) command allows you to work with the entries
in a binding directory.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority are searched.
v To perform operations on the binding directories, you must have *USE authority to the command and
the appropriate authority to the binding directory on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
BNDDIR Binding directory Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Binding Name
directory
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL

Top

Binding directory (BNDDIR)

Work with the entries in the specified binding directory.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Binding directory

name Specify the name of the binding directory whose entries are to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the
job, the QGPL library is used.
*USRLIBL
Only the libraries in the user portion of the job’s library list are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 9

Examples
WRKBNDDIRE BNDDIR(COINS)

This command allows you to work with the entries in binding directory COINS.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF5D01
Binding directory &1 in library &2 is not usable.
CPF980F
Binding directory &1 in library &2 not found.
CPF9801
Object &2 in library &3 not found.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
CPF9807
One or more libraries in library list deleted.
CPF9808
Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
Top

10 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with BOOTP table (WRKBPTBL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with BOOTP Table (WRKBPTBL) command allows you to work with entries in the BOOTP
table. Each table entry contains a client host name, an MAC address, and an internet protocol (IP)
address.

You can add, change, remove, or display entries in this table. You can also print the table.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKBPTBL

This command displays the Configure TCP/IP BOOTP Table menu.

Top

Error messages
Unknown
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 11

12 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Configuration Lists (WRKCFGL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Configuration Lists (WRKCFGL) command allows you to work with configuration list
functions through the Work with Configuration Lists display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CFGL Configuration list Generic name, name, *ALL, *APPNDIR, *APPNLCL, Optional,
*APPNRMT, *APPNSSN, *ASYNCADR, *ASYNCLOC, Positional 1
*RTLPASTHR, *SNAPASTHR

Top

Configuration list (CFGL)

Specifies the configuration list to work with.
*ALL Work with all configuration lists.
*APPNDIR
Work with the advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN) directory configuration list.
generic-configuration-list-name
Specify a generic configuration list name.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
configuration-list-name
Specify the name of a specific configuration list.
*APPNLCL
Work with the APPN local location configuration list.
*APPNRMT
Work with the APPN remote location configuration list.
*APPNSSN
Work with the APPN session configuration list.
*ASYNCADR
Work with asynchronous PAD network address configuration list(s).
*ASYNCLOC
Work with the asynchronous remote location configuration list.
*RTLPASTHR
Work with the retail pass-through configuration list.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 13

*SNAPASTHR
Work with the SNA pass-through configuration list.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Examples
WRKCFGL CFGL(PEG*)

This command allows you to utilize the Work with Configuration Lists panel to work with entries for all
configuration lists whose names start with ’PEG’.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

14 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) command is used to display and to work with
configuration status functions. When you run this command, the Work with Configuration Status display
is shown.

For network server descriptions, the status displayed is the configuration status of the object. Options are
available from Work with Configuration Status to display the status of the network server functions and
client sessions. Use this option to check for active clients before varying off a network server.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CFGTYPE Type *NWS, *NWI, *LIN, *CTL, *DEV Required,
Positional 1
CFGD Configuration description Generic name, name, *ALL, *CMN, *ASYNC, *BSC, *DDI, Optional,
*ELAN, *FAX, *FR, *IDLC, *NET, *PPP, *SDLC, *TDLC, Positional 2
*TRLAN, *WLS, *X25, *WS, *LWS, *RWS, *VWS, *CRP,
*DKT, *MLB, *OPTMLB, *TAPMLB, *OPT, *ASP, *TAP,
*DSP, *LCLDSP, *RMTDSP, *VRTDSP, *PRT, *LANPRT,
*LCLPRT, *RMTPRT, *VRTPRT, *LOC, *SNPT, *APPC,
*FNC, *HOST, *RTL, *INTRA, *ATM, *ISDN, *T1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 3
RMTLOCNAME Remote location Generic name, name, *NONE Optional
RANGE Range *NET, *OBJ Optional
STATUS Status *ALL, *ACTIVE, *FAILED, *VARYOFF, *VARYON, Optional
*AVAILABLE
ASTLVL Assistance level *PRV, *USRPRF, *BASIC, *INTERMED, *ADVANCED Optional

Top

Type (CFGTYPE)
Specifies the type of description for which you want the status to be shown.

The possible values are:

*NWS Status for network servers is shown.
*NWI Status for network interfaces is displayed.
*LIN Status for lines is displayed.
*CTL Status for controllers is displayed.
*DEV Status for devices is displayed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 15

 Top

Configuration description (CFGD)

Specifies the descriptions you want displayed on the Work with Configuration Status display.
*ALL Status for all network interfaces, all lines, all controllers, or all devices is displayed depending on
the value of the Type prompt (CFGTYPE parameter). Status for any attached controllers and
devices is also shown.
generic-description-name
Specify a generic description name.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
*CMN Status for communications controllers or devices is displayed depending on the value of the Type
prompt (CFGTYPE parameter).
*APPC
Status for Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC) controllers or devices are
displayed.
*ASP Status for Auxiliary storage pool (ASP) devices is displayed.
*ASYNC
Status for Async lines, controllers, or devices is displayed.
*ATM Status for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) network interfaces is displayed.
*BSC Status for Bisynchronous lines, controllers, or devices is displayed.
*DDI Status for all distributed data interface lines is displayed.
*DKT Status for diskette devices is displayed.
*DSP Status for display devices is displayed.
*ELAN
Status for Ethernet lines is displayed.
*FAX Status for all facsimile (fax) lines is displayed.
*FNC Status for finance controllers or devices is displayed.
*FR Status for all frame relay network interfaces or lines is displayed.
*HOST
Status for all host controllers or devices is displayed.
*IDLC Status for IDLC lines is displayed.
*INTRA
Status for intrasystem devices are displayed.
*ISDN
Status for Integrated Systems Digital Network (ISDN) network interfaces are displayed.
*LANPRT
Status descriptions of local area network (LAN) printer devices are shown.
*LCLDSP
Status for local display station devices is displayed.

16 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
*LCLPRT
Status for local printer devices is displayed.
*LOC Status for devices at a specific remote location is displayed. To specify *LOC, you must specify
*DEV for the Type prompt (CFGTYPE parameter).
*LWS Status for local work station controllers is displayed.
*MLB Status for both optical and tape media library devices is displayed.
*NET Status for network lines, controllers, or devices is displayed.
*OPT Status for optical devices is displayed.
*CRP Status for cryptographic devices is displayed.
*OPTMLB
Status for optical media library devices is displayed.
*PPP Status descriptions of Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) lines are shown.
*PRT Status for all printer devices is displayed.
*RMTDSP
Status for remote display station devices is displayed.
*RMTPRT
Status for remote printer devices is displayed.
*RTL Status for retail controllers or devices is displayed.
*RWS Status for remote work station controllers is displayed.
*SDLC
Status for SDLC lines is displayed.
*SNPT
Status descriptions of SNA pass-through devices are shown.
*T1 Status for T1 network interfaces is displayed.
*TAP Status for tape controllers or devices is displayed, depending on the value of the Type prompt
(CFGTYPE parameter).
*TAPMLB
Status of tape media library devices is displayed.
*TDLC
Status for TDLC lines is displayed.
*TRLAN
Status for Token-ring lines is displayed.
*VRTDSP
Status for virtual (pass-through) display station devices is displayed.
*VRTPRT
Status for virtual (pass-through) printer devices is displayed.
*VWS Status for virtual (pass-through) work station controllers is displayed.
*WS Status for all work station controllers is displayed.
*X25 Status for X.25 lines is displayed. Status for all display station devices is displayed.
description-name
Specify a description name. Status for the specific description and any attachments is displayed.
Top

Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) 17

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME)

Specifies the remote location name of the devices for which you want status displayed. Only those device
descriptions with the specified remote location name are listed on the Work with Configuration Status
display.

This parameter is required if *LOC is specified for the Configuration description prompt (CFGD
parameter). It is not a valid parameter if any value other than *LOC is specified for the Configuration
description prompt (CFGD parameter).
*NONE
Status is not being displayed depending on the remote location name. *NONE should be
specified if *NWI, *LIN, or *CTL is specified for the Type prompt (CFGTYPE parameter). *NONE
should also be specified if any value other than *LOC is specified for the Configuration
description prompt (CFGD parameter).
remote-location-name
Specify the remote location name of the devices for which you want status displayed.
generic-remote-location-name
Specify a generic remote location name.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
Top

Range (RANGE)
Specifies whether downline or upline attached configuration descriptions are shown.
*NET If a name for a single description is specified for the Configuration description prompt (CFGD
parameter), both downline and upline descriptions are shown. If a special value or generic name
is specified for the CFGD parameter, downline descriptions are shown.
*OBJ Only objects of the type specified by the Type prompt (CFGTYPE parameter) are shown.
Top

18 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Status (STATUS)
Specifies the status values used to subset the list of descriptions shown. This parameter is ignored if a
name for a single description is specified for the Configuration description prompt (CFGD parameter).
*ALL All descriptions are included in the list regardless of their status.
*ACTIVE
All descriptions with an active status are shown.
*AVAILABLE
All descriptions with an available status are shown.
*FAILED
All descriptions with a failed, recovery, damaged, shutdown, or unknown status are shown.
*VARYOFF
All descriptions with a varied off or vary off pending status are shown.
*VARYON
All descriptions that do not have a varied off or vary off pending status are shown.
Top

Assistance level (ASTLVL)

Specifies which user interface to use.

The possible values are:

*PRV The previous user interface used is shown.
*USRPRF
The user interface specified on the Assistance level prompt (ASTLVL parameter) of your user
profile is used.
*BASIC
The Operational Assistant user interface is used.
Note: The *BASIC value is valid on the Assistance level prompt (ASTLVL parameter) only when
*DEV is specified on the Type prompt (CFGTYPE parameter).
*INTERMED
The system user interface is used.
*ADVANCED
The expert user interface is used.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Showing the Status for All Remote Display Stations
WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*DEV) CFGD(*RMTDSP)

This command uses the Work with Configuration Status display to show the status for all remote display
stations.

Example 2: Showing the Status for All Network Servers

WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*NWS) CFGD(*ALL)

Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) 19

This command allows the user to utilize the Work with Configuration Status command to show the status
for all network servers on the system.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF1E99
Unexpected error occurred.
CPF2602
Controller &1 not found.
CPF2702
Device description &1 not found.
CPF2703
Controller description &1 not found.
CPF2704
Line description &1 not found.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
Top

20 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Chart Formats (WRKCHTFMT)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Chart Formats (WRKCHTFMT) command allows you to show a list of chart formats from
one or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the chart formats to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the chart formats, you must have *USE authority to the command used by
the operation, and appropriate authority to the chart formats on which the operation is to be
performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CHTFMT Chart format Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Chart format Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Chart format (CHTFMT)

Specifies the chart formats to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Chart format

*ALL All chart formats in the libraries identified in the library qualifier are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the chart formats to be shown. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
chart formats that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the chart format to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 21

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKCHTFMT CHTFMT(LIB01/ABC*)

This command allows you to work with a list of chart formats beginning with chart formats whose names
begin with ’ABC’ that are stored in library LIB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

22 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Classes (WRKCLS)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Classes (WRKCLS) command allows you to show a list of available classes from one or
more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the classes to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the classes, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the classes on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CLS Class Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Class Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Class (CLS)
Specifies the class descriptions to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Class
*ALL All class descriptions are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the class descriptions to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all class descriptions that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
shown.
name Specify the name of the class description to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 23

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKCLS CLS(LIB01/ABC*)

This command allows you to display and work with a list of classes beginning with class objcts whose
names begin with ’ABC’ that are in library LIB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

24 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Commands (WRKCMD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Commands (WRKCMD) command allows you to display a list of commands from one or
more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the commands to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the commands, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the commands on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CMD Command Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Command Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Command (CMD)
Specifies the commands to be shown on the Work with Commands display.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Command
*ALL All commands are shown on the Work with Commands display.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the commands to be shown. A generic name is a character string that
contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
commands that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the command to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 25

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKCMD CMD(QGPL/DSP*)

This command allows you to work with a list of all commands in the QGPL library that start with ’DSP’.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

26 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Commitment Def (WRKCMTDFN)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Commitment Definitions (WRKCMTDFN) command is used to work with the
commitment definitions on the system. A commitment definition is used to store information about
commitment control when commitment control is started by the Start Commitment Control
(STRCMTCTL) command. These commitment definitions may or may not be associated with an active
job. Those not associated with an active job have been ended, but one or more of its logical units of work
has not yet been completed.

The STATUS parameter can be used to subset the list of commitment definitions by their status. For
example, a status value of *RESYNC displays a list of all commitment definitions that are involved with
resynchronizing their resources. Commitment definitions may be involved with resynchronizing resources
in an effort to reestablish a synchronization point across the logical unit of work. A synchronization point
is where all resources within a logical unit of work are in consistent state. A status value of
*UNDECIDED displays a list of all commitment definitions involved with a commit operation that are
waiting to receive the decision to either commit or rollback. A status value of *XOPEN displays a list of
all commitment definitions associated with an X/Open global transaction.

The ASP group parameter can be used to subset the list of commitment definitions by the auxiliary
storage pool (ASP) on which they reside.

The logical unit of work identifier (LUWID) parameter can be used when trying to find the commitment
definition on the system which is working with a commitment definition on another system. The jobs
containing these commitment definitions are communicating using an APPC conversation. An LUWID
can be found by displaying the commitment definition on one system and then using it as input to the
WRKCMTDFN command to find the corresponding commitment definition.

The duplicate job option (DUPJOBOPT) parameter specifies the action taken when duplicate jobs are
found by this command. If duplicate jobs are found they can either be displayed in a list the user can
select from or a message can be issued for each duplicate job found.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JOB Job name Single values: *, *ALL Optional,
Other values: Qualified job name Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Job name Name
Qualifier 2: User Name
Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999
STATUS Status *ALL, *RESYNC, *UNDECIDED, *XOPEN Optional,
Positional 2
ASPGRP ASP group Name, *ALLAVL, *SYSBAS Optional
LUWID Logical unit of work ID Character value, *ALL Optional
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional
DUPJOBOPT Duplicate job option *SELECT, *MSG Optional

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 27

 Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the names of the jobs (if any) whose commitment definitions are shown. If a job name is not
qualified, all jobs by that name have their commitment definitions displayed. When *ALL is not specified,
only commitment definitions with lock scope *JOB are shown, even though commitment definitions with
lock scope *TNSOBJ may be attached to threads in the specified jobs. To show commitment definitions
with lock scope *TNSOBJ, *ALL must be specified.

A job identifier is a special value or a qualified name with up to three elements. For example:
*
*ALL
job-name
user-name/job-name
job-number/user-name/job-name
* The commitment definitions which are associated with the job where the WRKCMTDFN
command is issued are shown.
*ALL Commitment definitions for all jobs on the system are shown.
job-name
Specify the name of the job which is associated with the commitment definitions to be shown.
user-name
Specify the name of the user which is associated with the commitment definitions to be shown.
job-number
Specify the number of the job which is associated with the commitment definitions to be shown.
Top

Status (STATUS)
Specifies that only the commitment definitions with a status that matches the value specified on this
parameter are listed.
*ALL Commitment definitions with all status’ are shown.
*RESYNC
Only commitment definitions which are involved with resynchronizing resources are shown. A
commitment definition may be involved with resynchronization in an effort to reestablish a
synchronization point. A synchronization point is the point where all resources are in a consistent
state.
*UNDECIDED
Only commitment definitions whose logical unit of work is in a state that is undecided are
shown. A commitment definition is in an undecided state when the decision to either commit or
rollback resources is unknown to the commitment definition.
*XOPEN
Only commitment definitions associated with an X/Open global transaction are shown.
Top

28 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
ASP group (ASP Group)
Specifies the Auxiliary Storage Pool (ASP) group of the commitment definitions to be shown.
*ALLAVL
All commitment definitions in all online ASPs are shown.
*SYSBAS
Only commitment definitions in the system ASP (ASP number 1) and basic ASPs (ASP numbers
2-32) are shown.
auxiliary-storage-pool-group-name
Only commitment definitions in the specified ASP group are shown.
Top

Logical unit of work ID (LUWID)

Specifies the logical unit of work identifier of the commitment definition to be shown.

A logical unit of work identifier is a character string made up of three elements:

v Network-qualified logical unit (LU) name
v Instance number
v Sequence number

The network-qualified LU name consists of a character network ID with a maximum of 8 characters, a

period delimiter, followed by a LU name with a maximum of 8 characters. The instance number is
entered as a 12 character value, each character representing a single hexadecimal digit. The value must be
entered in hexadecimal format. For example, X’123456789012’. The sequence number is a decimal value
with values ranging from 1 through 65535. For example:
APPN.RCHASLGU.X’12578A3BDCFF’.23657
*ALL Commitment definitions associated with all logical units of work are shown.
generic*-logical-unit-of-work-identifier
Specify the generic name of a logical unit of work identifier. A generic name is a character string
of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. If a generic name is
specified, all commitment definitions with logical unit of work identifiers that begin with the
generic name are shown. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system
assumes it to be the complete logical unit of work identifier.
logical-unit-of-work-identifier
Specify a maximum of 39 characters for the logical unit of work identifier associated with a
commitment definition.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is shown at the requesting display station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* Output requested by an interactive job is shown on the display. Output requested by a batch job
is printed with the job’s spooled output.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

Work with Commitment Def (WRKCMTDFN) 29

 Top

Duplicate job option (DUPJOBOPT)

Specifies the action taken when duplicate jobs are found by this command.
*SELECT
The Selection display is shown when duplicate jobs are found during an interactive session. For a
batch job, a message is shown.
*MSG A message is issued when duplicate jobs are found.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Limiting by Job

The following example will display a list of commitment definitions associated with the specified job. Of
all the commitment definitions on the system, only those associated with the specified job will be listed.
WRKCMTDFN JOB(012345/WULF/WULFS1)

Example 2: Limiting by Commitment Definitions Involved with Resynchronizing Resources

The following example will display a list of all of the commitment definitions on the system that are
involved with resynchronizing their resources.
WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) STATUS(*RESYNC)

Example 3: Limiting by Commitment Definitions That Are Undecided

The following example will display a list of all of the commitment definitions on the system that are in
an undecided state. The commitment definitions are in an undecided state when their logical unit of
work state is either prepared or last-agent pending.
WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) STATUS(*UNDECIDED)

Example 4: Limiting by Commitment Definitions That Are Associated With An X/Open Global
Transaction

The following example will display a list of all the commitment definitions associated with an X/Open
global transaction.
WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) STATUS(*XOPEN)

Example 5: Limiting by LUWID

WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) LUWID(APPN.RCHASL7E.X’11223344BDFF’.*)

This command will display a list of all the commitment definitions whose logical unit of work ID begins
with the specified generic value. Of all those commitment definitions on the system, only those whose
logical unit of work id’s begin with the generic value will be listed.

Example 6: Limiting by System ASP

WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) ASPGRP(*SYSBAS)

This command will display a list of all the commitment definitions that reside on the system auxiliary
storage pool (ASP number 1).

30 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Example 7: Limiting by ASP Device Description Name
WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) ASPGRP(IASP0035)

This command will display a list of all the commitment definitions that reside on the independent
auxiliary storage pool (ASP) associated with ASP device description IASP0035.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF0941
Job &3/&2/&1 no longer in system.
CPF1069
End of duplicate names.
CPF1070
Job &3/&2/&1 not found.
CPF1071
No authority to job &3/&2/&1.
CPF83E5
Not authorized to jobs.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9850
Override of printer file &1 not allowed.
CPF9851
Overflow value for file &1 in &2 too small.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

Work with Commitment Def (WRKCMTDFN) 31

32 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Connection Lists (WRKCNNL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Connection Lists (WRKCNNL) command allows you to work with a connection list.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CNNL Connection list Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Connection list (CNNL)

This is a required parameter.

Specifies the connection list to work with.

*ALL All connection lists are worked with.
generic-name
Specify a generic name of connection lists to be worked with. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
connection lists that have names with the same prefix as the generic connection list are displayed.
name Specify a specific connection list name.
Top

Examples
WRKCNNL CNNL(CHI*)

This command displays the Work with Connection List panel to work with connection lists which have
names that begin with ’CHI’ and for which the user has authority.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2625
Not able to allocate object &1.
CPF2634
Not authorized to object &1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 33

CPF266C
Connection list &1 not found.
CPF266D
Program name &1 not found in system library.
CPF266E
Connection list &1 has been damaged.
Top

34 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Contact Information (WRKCNTINF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Contact Information (WRKCNTINF) command is used to work with the information that
helps you contact, or be contacted by, various support centers. The contact information is supplied to you
by your market support center and your service support center. This command shows a menu where you
select a support function.

Restriction: To use this command, the user must be signed on as QSRV or QSRVBAS, or have *ALLOBJ
authority.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKCNTINF

This command displays the Work with Support Contact Information panel.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF8C84
Error detected while processing support contact data.
CPF8C96
Description is a required field.
CPF8C97
Description already exists in system directory.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 35

36 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with COS Descriptions (WRKCOSD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Class-of-Service Descriptions (WRKCOSD) command provides an interactive interface to
class-of-service description functions through the Work with Class-of-Service Descriptions display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
COSD Class-of-service description Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Class-of-service description (COSD)

Specifies the class-of-service description to work with.
*ALL Work with all class-of-service descriptions.
generic-COS-description-name
Specify a generic class-of-service description name.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
COS-description-name
Specify a specific class-of-service description.
Top

Examples
WRKCOSD COSD(MPLS*)

This command displays the Work with Class-of-Service Descriptions panel which shows entries for all
class-of-service descriptions whose names start with ’MPLS’.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 37

38 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work Comm Side Information (WRKCSI)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Communications Side Information (WRKCSI) command allows you to work with side
information in the specified library or libraries. From the list of side information objects that is displayed,
you can create, delete, change, print, or display entries.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CSI Side information Qualified object name Optional,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Side information Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Side information (CSI)

Specifies the object name for the side information object you want to work with.

This is a required parameter.

The possible values are:

*ALL All lists of side information objects are shown.
side-information-name
Specify the name and library of the list of side information objects to be shown.
generic*-side-information-name
Specify the generic name of side information objects to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). All side information
objects with same prefix as the generic side information object are shown.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched to locate the side information object. If no current
library entry exists in the library list, QGPL is used.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 39

*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
library-name
Specify the library name where the side information object is located. Only the library named in
this parameter is searched.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Displaying Information Objects
WRKCSI

This command displays all the side information objects that exist in any library in the library list. From
the Work with Communications Side Information panel, you can work with the side information objects.

Example 2: Displaying Objects the Begin with ’SIDE’

WRKCSI CSI(QGPL/SIDE*)

This command displays all the side information objects that begin with the letters ’SIDE’ and are located
in library QGPL. From the Work with Communications Side Information panel, you can work with the
side information objects.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

40 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Ctl Descriptions (WRKCTLD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Controller Descriptions (WRKCTLD) command allows you to work with controller
description functions through the Work with Controller Descriptions display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
CTLD Controller description Generic name, name, *ALL, *CMN, *WS, *TAP, *LWS, Optional,
*RWS, *VWS Positional 1

Top

Controller description (CTLD)

Specifies the name of the controller description.
*ALL Work with all controller descriptions.
generic-controller-description-NAME
Specify a generic controller description NAME.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
controller-description-NAME
Work with a specific controller description.
*CMN Work with communications controller descriptions.
*WS Work with work station controller descriptions.
*TAP Work with tape controller descriptions.
*LWS Work with local work station controller descriptions.
*RWS Work with remote work station controller descriptions.
*VWS Work with virtual (pass-through) work station controller descriptions.
Top

Examples
WRKCTLD CTLD(*LWS)

This command displays the Work with Controller Descriptions panel to work with entries for all local
work station controllers to which you have authority.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 41

 Top

Error messages
None
Top

42 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with DB Files using IDDU (WRKDBFIDD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Database Files Using the Interactive Data Definition Utility (IDDU) (WRKDBFIDD)
command shows the Work with Database Files display. From this display, you can select options that
allow you to create physical files or to enter data into a file.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
LIB Library Name, *PRV, *CURLIB Optional

Top

Library (LIB)
Specifies the name of the library containing the files.
*PRV The files are located in the last library you worked with in IDDU. If this is the first time you
worked with IDDU, your current library is used.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched to locate the files. If no current library entry exists in
the library list, QGPL is used.
library-name
Specify the library where the files are located.
Top

Examples
WRKDBFIDD DEPT245

This command displays the Work with Database Files panel and allows you to work with IDDU database
files in the DEPT245 library.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 43

44 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with DDM Files (WRKDDMF)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Distributed Data Management Files (WRKDDMF) command shows a list of DDM files.
From this list, you can:
v Change DDM files
v Delete DDM files
v Display details of DDM files
v Create DDM files
v Print a list of the DDM files
v Print details of DDM files
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FILE File Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: File Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALL, *ALLUSR
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

File (FILE)
Specifies the name and library of the DDM files to be selected. A generic DDM file name or *ALL can be
specified.

The possible file values are:

*ALL All files in the specified library (or all libraries identified in the library qualifier to which the user
has access) are listed.
file-name
Specify the name of the DDM file to be selected. If *LIBL or *USRLIBL is specified as the library
name, all DDM files found with the specified name are listed.
generic*-file-name
Specify the generic name of the DDM files to be selected. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified on
this parameter, all files that have names with the same prefix as the generic file are selected.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 45

*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.

The possible values are:

* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

Top

46 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Examples
WRKDDMF

This command shows the Work with DDM Files panel.

Top

Error messages
None
Top

Work with DDM Files (WRKDDMF) 47

48 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Device Descriptions (WRKDEVD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Device Descriptions (WRKDEVD) command is used to display and to work with device
description functions through the Work with Device Descriptions panel.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DEVD Device description Generic name, name, *ALL, *ASP, *CMN, *DKT, *DSP, Optional,
*LCLDSP, *RMTDSP, *VRTDSP, *LOC, *MLB, *OPTMLB, Positional 1
*TAPMLB, *OPT, *PRT, *LANPRT, *LCLPRT, *RMTPRT,
*VRTPRT, *CRP, *TAP, *SNPT
RMTLOCNAME Remote location Generic name, name, *NONE Optional

Top

Device description (DEVD)

Specifies the name of the device description.
*ALL Work with all device descriptions.
*ASP Work with auxiliary storage pool devices.
*CMN Work with communications devices.
*CRP Work with cryptographic devices.
*DKT Work with diskette unit (drive) devices.
*DSP Work with all display station devices.
*LCLDSP
Work with local display station devices.
*RMTDSP
Work with remote display station devices.
*VRTDSP
Work with virtual (pass-through) display station devices.
*LOC Work with devices at a specific remote location.
*MLB Both optical and tape media library devices are shown.
*OPTMLB
Optical media library devices are shown.
*TAPMLB
Tape media library devices are shown.
*OPT Optical disk devices are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 49

*PRT Work with all printer devices.
*LANPRT
Printer devices attached to a local area network (LAN) are shown.
*LCLPRT
Work with local printer devices.
*RMTPRT
Work with remote printer devices.
*VRTPRT
Work with virtual (pass-through) printer devices.
*TAP Work with tape unit (drive) devices.
*SNPT
Work with SNA pass-through devices.
generic-device-description-name
Specify a generic device description name.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
device-description-name
Work with a specific device description.
Top

Remote location (RMTLOCNAME)

Specifies the remote location name for those device descriptions that are to be displayed. Only those
device descriptions with the specified remote location name are listed on the Work with Device
Descriptions display. This parameter is required if *LOC is specified for the Device description (DEVD)
parameter. It is not a valid parameter if any value other than *LOC is specified for the DEVD parameter.
*NONE
If *NONE is specified, all of the devices with a remote location name of *NONE can be worked
with.
Note: *NONE should be specified if any value other than *LOC is specified for the DEVD
parameter.
remote-location-name
Specify the remote location name of the devices you want to work with.
generic-controller-description
Specify a generic controller description.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
Top

Examples
WRKDEVD DEVD(*LCLPRT)

50 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
This command displays the Work with Device Descriptions panel showing all the local printers to which
you have authority.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

Work with Device Descriptions (WRKDEVD) 51

52 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Device Tables (WRKDEVTBL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Device Tables (WRKDEVTBL) command allows you to display and work with finance
device tables and, once they are created, allows addition or deletion of device names in these tables.
Several finance device tables can be defined, but each table must have a unique name.

An updated finance device table can be accessed by any finance job submitted after all changes are
completed.

Restriction: Only the QFNC user profile is authorized to use this command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DEVTBL Device table Name, *SELECT, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
TEXT Text ’description’ Character value, *BLANK Optional

Top

Device table (DEVTBL)

Specifies the name of a device table that contains 4704 or 3624 device names.

The possible values are:

*ALL Displays all of the device tables currently defined.
*SELECT
The Work with Device Tables display is shown. Through this display you can create, change,
delete, or display device tables.
device-table-name
Specify the name of the device table that you want to work with.
Top

Text ’description’ (TEXT)

Specifies the text that briefly describes the object.

The possible values are:

*BLANK
No text is specified.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 53

’description’
Specify no more than 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Working With All Finance Device Tables
WRKDEVTBL DEVTBL(*SELECT)

This command allows you to work with all of the finance device tables. The options are to add a new
table, select an existing table for update, or create, delete, or display tables.

Example 2: Working With One Finance Device Table

WRKDEVTBL DEVTBL(DEVTBL1)

This command allows you to work with the device table DEVTBL1. The options are to create a new table,
or change, display, or delete the table.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF8379
Error while processing file &1 in &2.
CPF8380
Error while opening file &1 in &2.
CPF8381
Error while closing file &1 in &2.
Top

54 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Directory Entries (WRKDIRE)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Directory Entries (WRKDIRE) command allows you to work with a set of panels to view,
add, change, and remove entries in the distribution directory. When the WRKDIRE command is entered,
the system shows either one or all of the entries in the system distribution directory, depending on the
parameters specified. If the parameter specified applies to more than one directory entry, the system
displays a list of directory entries. If the parameter identifies a specific directory user, the system displays
a list of entries for which that user has authority.

Restriction: You must have security administrator authority (*SECADM) to update all entries in the
directory. Restrictions on the data entries that can be updated apply when this command is run without
*SECADM authority. General access to view and print the directory is provided by the DSPDIRE
command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
USRID User identifier Single values: *ALL Optional,
Other values: Element list Positional 1
Element 1: User ID Character value
Element 2: Address Character value
USER User profile Name, *CURRENT Optional,
Positional 2
CMDCHRID Command character Single values: *SYSVAL, *DEVD Optional
identifier Other values: Element list
Element 1: Graphic character Integer
set
Element 2: Code page Integer

Top

User identifier (USRID)

Specifies the user ID and the address of user for whom the request is made. If the USRID parameter is
specified, the USER parameter cannot be specified.
*ALL All directory entries in the system distribution directory are shown. The entries are shown in
alphabetical order by the user ID and address.

The possible user ID value is:

user-ID
Specify the user ID of the user for whom the directory entry is shown.

The possible user address value is:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 55

user-ID
Specify the user address of the user for whom the directory entry is shown.
Top

User profile (USER)

Specifies, by user profile, which directory entry to display. If the user profile has no directory entries
associated with it, an error message is sent. If the USER parameter is specified, the USRID parameter
cannot be specified.
*CURRENT
The user profile under which the current job is running is used.
user-profile-name
Specify the user profile of a directory entry shown. This is the 10-character profile used to sign on
the system.
Top

Command character identifier (CMDCHRID)

Specifies the character identifier (graphic character set and code page) for data being specified as
parameter values on this command. This character identifier (CHRID) is related to the display device
used to specify the command. More information about CHRID processing is in the Application Display
Programming book, SC41-5715.
*SYSVAL
The system determines the graphic character set and code page values for the command
parameters from the QCHRID system values.
*DEVD
The system determines the graphic character set and code page values for the command
parameter from the display device description where the command is entered. This option is
valid only when specified from an interactive job. If this value is specified in an interactive CL
program or a batch job, an error message is sent.

The possible character set value is:

graphic-character-set
Specify the graphic character set values used to create the command parameters. Valid values
range from 1 through 9999.

The possible code page value is:

code-page
Specify the code page. Valid values range from 1 through 9999.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Using WRKDIRE with Administrator Authority
WRKDIRE USRID(HURST NEWYORK)

56 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Assume the user who is running this command has administrator authority. If the user ID and address of
HURST NEWYORK exists in the directory, the Work with Directory Entries panel is shown listing all
entries for HURST NEWYORK.

Example 2: Using WRKDIRE with Security Administrator Authority

WRKDIRE USER(JONES)

Assume the user who is running this command has security administrator authority. If the user profile of
JONES exists in the directory, the Work with Directory Entries panel displays the entry with the user
profile name of JONES. Multiple entries are displayed if JONES has more than one description.

Example 3: Using WRKDIRE with Security Administrator Authority

WRKDIRE

Assume the user who is running this command has security administrator authority. The Work with
Directory Entries panel displays a listing of all entries in the directory.

Example 4: Using WRKDIRE Without Security Administrator Authority

WRKDIRE

Assume the user who is running this command does not have security administrator authority. The
Change Your Directory Details panel is displayed for this user. A message appears on the message line of
this panel indicating that this user is authorized only to change the user’s directory entry.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9006
User not enrolled in system distribution directory.
CPF905C
Error occurred trying to find a translation table.
CPF9838
User profile storage limit exceeded.
Top

Work with Directory Entries (WRKDIRE) 57

58 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Directory Locations (WRKDIRLOC)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Directory Locations (WRKDIRLOC) command provides a set of displays that allow an
administrator to add, change, remove, display, print, and combine locations. When the WRKDIRLOC
command is entered, the Work with Directory Locations display is shown with all the locations defined.

Restriction: The user of this command must have at least security administrator (*SECADM) authority.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKDIRLOC

This command displays the Work with Directory Locations panel. The panel lists all of the locations
currently defined.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 59

60 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Dir Shadow Systems (WRKDIRSHD)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Directory Shadow Systems (WRKDIRSHD) command provides a set of displays that
allows an administrator to view, add, change, and remove shadow system entries. The user can work
with systems that are supplying the local system or are collecting from the local system.

Restriction: You must have security administrator (*SECADM) authority to use this command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
TYPE Type of shadow system *SUPPLIER, *COLLECTOR Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Type of shadow system (TYPE)

Specifies the shadow systems with which the user wants to work.
*SUPPLIER
The user is allowed to work with the systems supplying directory data to the local system. The
Work with Directory Shadow Suppliers display is shown.
*COLLECTOR
The user is allowed to work with the systems collecting from the local system. The Work with
Directory Shadow Collectors display is shown.
Top

Examples
WRKDIRSHD TYPE(*SUPPLIER)

This command displays the Work with Directory Shadow Suppliers panel. The Work with Directory
Shadow Suppliers panel allows you to add, change, remove, and display supplier systems, to suspend
shadowing from supplier systems, and to resume shadowing for supplier systems that have previously
been suspended.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 61

CPF90A8
*SECADM special authority required to do requested operation.
CPF905C
Error occurred trying to find a translation table.
CPF9838
User profile storage limit exceeded.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
Top

62 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Documents (WRKDOC)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Documents (WRKDOC) command is a request to show the Work With Documents In
Folders display or the Work With Non-text Document Data display.

From the Work With Documents In Folders display, you can select options to create, revise, copy, delete,
view, print, rename, describe, print with options, send, check spelling, file document remotely, paginate,
and work with document authority.

From the Work With Non-text Document Data display, you can select an option to copy, delete, and
rename non-text data, such as graphs and images.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DOC Document *ALL, *NONTXTDTA Optional,
Positional 1
FLR Folder Character value, *PRV, *SELECT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Document (DOC)
Specifies which display to show.
*ALL The Work With Documents In Folders display is shown.
*NONTXTDTA
The Work With Non-text Document Data display is shown. On this display, you can work with
non-text data such as graphs or images.
Top

Folder (FLR)
Specifies the name of the folder to be used on the Work With Documents In Folders display or Work
With Non-text Document Data display.
*PRV The name of the folder from your last session is used.
*SELECT
A list of folders is displayed from which you can select a folder.
folder-name
Specify the name of the folder you want to work with on the specified display.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 63

 Top

Examples
WRKDOC DOC(*ALL) FLR(*SELECT)

This command displays the Work with Documents panel, and shows a list of folders from which to select
the working folder.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF90A8
*SECADM special authority required to do requested operation.
CPF9024
System cannot get correct record to finish operation.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
Top

64 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Document Libraries (WRKDOCLIB)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Document Libraries (WRKDOCLIB) command allows you to manage the Document
Interchange Architecture (DIA) library services available on remote systems in the network. A document
library name and level of DIA supported can be specified for each distribution queue with a Document
Library Services (DLS) queue type.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKDOCLIB

This command displays the Work with Document Libraries panel.

Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF90A8
*SECADM special authority required to do requested operation.
CPF9024
System cannot get correct record to finish operation.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 65

66 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Document Print Queue (WRKDOCPRTQ)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Document Print Queue (WRKDOCPRTQ) command calls OfficeVision/400 to show the
Work With Documents To Be Printed display. From this display, users can manage their printed output.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKDOCPRTQ

This command displays the Work with Documents to be Printed panel.

Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 67

68 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with DSNX/PC Queues (WRKDPCQ)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with DSNX/PC Distribution Queues (WRKDPCQ) command allows you to display and delete
specific DSNX/PC queue entries from a DSNX/PC queue. These queues are where Distributed System
Node Executive (DSNX) distributions that are bound for a personal computer (PC)(locally attached to the
system and configured in the system directory as a DSXN-PC node) are held. A personal computer
running DSNX-PC starts the DS-SEND function which sends the queued distributions to that requesting
personal computer.

Restriction: To use this command, the user must be signed on as QPGMR or QSYSOPR, or have
*ALLOBJ authority.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
PCNODE Distribution queue Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional

Top

Distribution queue (PCNODE)

Specifies the names of the PC node’s for which queue entries are shown.
*ALL All the PC nodes that currently have queue entries are shown.
PC-node-name
Specify the name of the PC node that is to have its entries shown.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.

The possible values are:

* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 69

 Top

Examples
WRKDPCQ

This command displays the Work with DSNX/PC Distribution Queues panel.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

70 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) command allows you to display and work with performance
and status information for the disk units on the system.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 1
RESET Reset status statistics *NO, *YES Optional

Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

Reset status statistics (RESET)

Specifies whether the disk statistics are reset to zero.
*NO The disk statistics are not reset. The measurement time interval is extended if a previous work
with disk status command has started in the current job.
*YES The disk statistics are reset. A measurement time interval of zero is used.
Top

Examples
WRKDSKSTS OUTPUT(*PRINT)

This command prints a report on the performance and status information for the disk units on the
system.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 71

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF1093
Override of file device type not valid.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9850
Override of printer file &1 not allowed.
CPF9851
Overflow value for file &1 in &2 too small.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

72 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Distribution Lists (WRKDSTL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Distribution Lists (WRKDSTL) command provides a set of displays that you can use to
view, create, add to, remove from, and delete distribution lists. A distribution list contains a list of
directory entries used to simplify sending distributions to a group of users.

Restriction: You must have security administrator (*SECADM) authority to change, delete, or rename
another user’s distribution list.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
LSTID List identifier Single values: *ALL Optional,
Other values: Element list Positional 1
Element 1: List ID Character value
Element 2: List ID qualifier Character value
CMDCHRID Command character Single values: *SYSVAL, *DEVD Optional
identifier Other values: Element list
Element 1: Graphic character Integer
set
Element 2: Code page Integer

Top

List identifier (LSTID)

Specifies by the two-part list ID which distribution lists are to be shown.
*ALL All distribution lists in the system distribution directory are shown. The entries are displayed in
alphabetical order by list ID.

The possible list identifier value is:

list-ID
Specify the list identifier (ID) of the distribution list.

The possible list qualifier value is:

list-ID-qualifier
Specify the list ID qualifier of the distribution list.
Note: The distribution list identifier has two parts, the ID and the qualifier, separated by at least
one space. If lowercase characters are specified, the system changes them to uppercase.
The naming rules for the two-part list ID are identical to the rules for the user ID and address. A
complete description of these rules is in the SNA Distribution Services book, SC41-5410.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 73

 Top

Command character identifier (CMDCHRID)

Specifies the character identifier (graphic character set and code page) for the data being entered as
command parameter values.

Note:
v Only the user ID and address, system name and group, department, and the X.400 O/R parameters are
translated to the graphic character set identifier (GCID) specified on this parameter. All other
parameter values that you specify are stored exactly as they are entered; the GCID value is stored with
them.
v If this command is run interactively, the default GCID value is taken from the display device
description. If it is run in batch, the default GCID value is taken from the QCHRID system value. You
can override these values by specifying a specific character set and code page on this parameter.

Single values
*SYSVAL
The system determines the graphic character set and code page values for the command
parameters from the QCHRID system value.
*DEVD
The system determines the graphic character set and code page values from the display device
description where this command was entered. This option is valid only when entered from an
interactive job. If this option is specified in a batch job, an error occurs.

Element 1: Graphic character set

1-32767
Specify the graphic character set to use.

Element 2: Code page

1-32767
Specify the code page to use.

Note:
v Only the user ID and address, system name and group, department, and the X.400 O/R parameters are
translated to the graphic character set identifier (GCID) specified on this parameter. All other
parameter values that you specify are stored exactly as they are entered; the GCID value is stored with
them.
v If this command is run interactively, the default GCID value is taken from the display device
description. If it is run in batch, the default GCID value is taken from the QCHRID system value. You
can override these values by specifying a specific character set and code page on this parameter.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Showing a Distribution List
WRKDSTL LSTID(WILL DISTLIST)

This command shows the Work with Distribution Lists panel with one entry, WILL DISTLIST. This
example assumes that WILL DISTLIST exists.

74 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Example 2: Showing All Distribution Lists
WRKDSTL

This command shows the Work with Distribution Lists panel with a list of all distribution lists in the
distribution directory.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9A83
Public nickname &1 not found.
CPF9A85
Nickname &1 not found.
CPF9024
System cannot get correct record to finish operation.
CPF905C
Error occurred trying to find a translation table.
CPF9052
List ID, &1 &2, cannot be found.
CPF9838
User profile storage limit exceeded.
Top

Work with Distribution Lists (WRKDSTL) 75

76 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Distribution Queue (WRKDSTQ)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Distribution Queue (WRKDSTQ) command displays and controls the distribution requests
on the Systems Network Architecture distribution services (SNADS) distribution queues. A detailed
description of SNADS is in the SNA Distribution Services book, SC41-5410.

Distribution queue names are translated to the graphic character set and code page 930 500, using the
job’s coded character set identifier (CCSID).

Restrictions:
v This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority, and the QPGMR and QSYSOPR user
profiles have private authorities to use the command.
v Before this command is run for the first time, the QSNADS subsystem must have been previously
started to create the internal SNADS objects that this command uses.
v Messages that report errors about distribution queues may display or print different characters than
you entered for the distribution queue name because of internal system transformations. Similarly
(depending on the language used for the work station), the internal value for a distribution queue
name may differ from the characters shown for the Work with Distribution Queue (WRKDSTQ)
command. An error may be reported if the character-string value specified for the Distribution queue
prompt (DSTQ parameter) does not match the rules for an internal distribution queue value or if it
does not match the internal value for any defined distribution queue (ignoring case differences).
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
QUEUE Distribution Element list Optional,
Positional 1
Element 1: Queue Character value, *ALL
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional

Top

Distribution (QUEUE)
Specifies the name of the distribution queue that is shown or printed. The queue specified must have
been previously configured using the Configure Distribution Services (CFGDSTSRV) command or the
Add Distribution Queue (ADDDSTQ) command.

The possible values are:

*ALL All SNADS distribution queues are shown or printed, in alphabetic order, by queue name.
distribution-queue-name
Specify a particular SNADS distribution queue.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 77

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.

The possible values are:

* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

Top

Examples
Example 1: Working With All Distribution Queues
WRKDSTQ

This command allows the user to work with the status and contents of all distribution queues. The
normal and high priority portions of each distribution queue are shown or printed.

Example 2: Printing Information

WRKDSTQ OUTPUT(*PRINT)

This command prints information on all distribution queues. The status of the normal and priority
portions of the distribution queues are printed followed by a list of the distribution requests on the
normal and high priority portions of each distribution queue.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF8802
Distribution queue &1 was not found.
CPF8806
Value &1 not valid for system name or system group.
CPF8807
Error occurred while using QSNADS journal.
CPF8809
Errors detected on SNADS internal queues.
CPF8812
Error occurred while processing distribution queues.
CPF8813
No entries exist.
CPF8819
Special value for distribution queue name not permitted.

78 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9850
Override of printer file &1 not allowed.
Top

Work with Distribution Queue (WRKDSTQ) 79

80 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Data Areas (WRKDTAARA)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Data Areas (WRKDTAARA) command allows you to show a list of data areas from one
or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the data areas to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the data areas, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the data areas on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DTAARA Data area Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Data area Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Data area (DTAARA)

Specifies the data areas to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Data area

*ALL All data areas are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the data areas to be shown. A generic name is a character string that
contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all data
areas that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the data area to be that is shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 81

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKDTAARA DTAARA(LIB01/ABC*)

This command allows you to display and work with a list of data areas beginning with the letters ’ABC’
that are stored in library LIB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
Top

82 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Data Dictionaries (WRKDTADCT)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Data Dictionaries (WRKDTADCT) command shows a display that allows you to select
options to create, change, delete, or print the contents of a data dictionary.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKDTADCT

This command displays the Work with Data Dictionaries panel.

Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 83

84 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Data Definitions (WRKDTADFN)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Data Definitions (WRKDTADFN) command allows you to work with data definitions.
You can create, change, copy, delete, print, rename, or display where defined terms in a data dictionary
are used. If the definition type is not specified, the Interactive Data Definition Utility (IDDU) Select
Definition Type display is shown. The dictionary and type of definition to process is selected from this
display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DTADCT Data dictionary Name, *PRV Optional,
Positional 1
DFNTYPE Definition type *ALL, *FILE, *RCDFMT, *FLD Optional

Top

Data dictionary (DTADCT)

Specifies the data dictionary to use.
*PRV The last data dictionary you worked with in IDDU is used.
data-dictionary-name
Specify the data dictionary name to use.
Top

Definition type (DFNTYPE)

Specifies the data definition type to use.
*ALL Allows you to select the definition type and data dictionary from a list of all the data dictionaries
and definition types.
*FILE Allows you to work with file definitions in the data dictionary specified.
*RCDFMT
Allows you to work with record format definitions in the data dictionary specified.
*FLD Allows you to work with field definitions in the data dictionary specified.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 85

Examples
WRKDTADFN DFNTYPE(*FILE)

This command allows you to work with file definitions in the data dictionary you worked with last.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

86 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Data Queues (WRKDTAQ)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Data Queues (WRKDTAQ) command allows you to show a list of available data queues
from one or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the data queues to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the data queues, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the data queues on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DTAQ Data queue Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Data queue Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Data queue (DTAQ)

Specifies a list of data queues to be shown. .*

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Data queue

*ALL All data queues are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the data queues to be shown. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
data queues that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the data queue to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 87

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKDTAQ DTAQ(LIB01/ABC*)

This command allows you to display and work with a list of data queues beginning with the letters
’ABC’ that are stored in library LIB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
Top

88 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Edit Descriptions (WRKEDTD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Edit Descriptions (WRKEDTD) command allows you to show a list of edit descriptions.

Restrictions:
v Only the edit descriptions to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the edit descriptions, you must have use (*USE) authority to the command
used by the operation, and the appropriate authority to the edit descriptions on which the operation is
to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
EDTD Edit description Qualifier list Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Edit description Generic name, name, *ALL

Top

Edit description (EDTD)

Specifies the edit description to be shown.
*ALL All edit descriptions are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the edit descriptions to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all edit descriptions that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
shown.
name Specify the name of the edit description to be shown.
Top

Examples
WRKEDTD EDTD(ABC*)

This command allows you to display and work with a list of edit descriptions beginning with the letters
’ABC’.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 89

Error messages
None
Top

90 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Environment Var (WRKENVVAR)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Environment Variables (WRKENVVAR) command can be used to show a list of the
environment variables on the Work with Environment Variables display. From this display, you can select
options to add, to change, to remove, to display the details of, or to print the environment variables.

Restriction: You must have *JOBCTL special authority to use this command to add, change, or remove
system-level environment variables.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
LEVEL Level *JOB, *SYS Optional

Top

Level of the environment variable. (LEVEL)

Specifies the level of the environment variable.

The possible values are:

*JOB Work with job-level environment variables.
*SYS Work with system-level environment variables.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Work with Job-level Environment Variables
WRKENVVAR

This command allows you to display and work with all job-level environment variables.

Example 2: Work with System-level Environment Variables

WRKENVVAR LEVEL(*SYS)

This command allows you to display and work with all system-level environment variables.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 91

Error messages
None
Top

92 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Files (WRKF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Files (WRKF) command shows a list of files and allows you to copy, delete, save, and
restore files, and to display file descriptions.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the files to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the files, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the files on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FILE File Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: File Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL
FILEATR File attributes *ALL, BSCF38, CMNF38, DDMF, DFU, DFUEXC, Optional,
DFUNOTEXC, DKTF, DSPF, DSPF38, ICFF, LF, LF38, Positional 2
MXDF38, PF, PF38, PRTF, PRTF38, SAVF, TAPF

Top

File (FILE)
Specifies the files to be shown on the Work with Files display.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: File
*ALL All files are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the files to be shown. A generic name is a character string that
contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all files
that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the file to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 93

*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

File attributes (FILEATR)

Specifies the type of file whose attributes are to be shown.
*ALL Files with all attributes are shown.
BSCF38
A list of binary synchronous communication (BSC) communications files for a System/38 is
shown.
CMNF38
A file that is used to read data from, or write data to a logical unit (LU1) or advanced
program-to-program communications (APPC) device and that allows the user to define the
format of the data on the logical unit or device. A communications (CMNF38) file is a device file
that is either created in the System/38 environment or migrated from a System/38 to support a
communications device.
DDMF
A list of the Distributed Data Management (DDM) files is shown.
DFU A list of data file utility (DFU) files is shown.

94 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
DFUEXC
A list of the System/38 data file utility (DFU) files which can be run using the System/38 data
file utility is shown.
DFUNOTEXC
A list of the System/38 data file utility (DFU) files which cannot be run using the System/38 data
file utility is shown.
DKTF A list of diskette files is shown.
DSPF A list of display files is shown.
DSPF38
A list of display files for a System/38 is shown.
ICFF A list of Interactive Communications Function (ICF) files is shown.
LF A list of logical files is shown.
LF38 A list of logical files for a System/38 is shown.
MXDF38
A list of mixed device files for a System/38 is shown.
PF A list of physical files is shown.
PF38 A list of physical files for a System/38 is shown.
PRTF A list of printer files is shown.
PRTF38
A list of printer files for a System/38 is shown.
SAVF A list of save files is shown.
TAPF A list of tape files is shown.
Top

Examples
WRKF FILE(X/PAY)

This command allows you to work with the file named PAY which is located in library X.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

Work with Files (WRKF) 95

96 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Function Usage (WRKFCNUSG)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: Yes Error messages

The Work with Function Usage (WRKFCNUSG) command shows a list of function identifiers and allows
you to change or display specified functions.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FCNID Function ID Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Function ID (FCNID)
Specifies the function ID of the functions that are listed on the Work with Function Usage display.
*ALL All function identifiers are listed.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the function identifiers to be listed. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all function identifiers that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
listed.
name Specify the name of the function ID to be listed.
Top

Examples
WRKFCNUSG FCNID(QIBM_SERVICE*)

This command shows the Work with Function Usage panel listing all functions with names starting with
QIBM_SERVICE.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF3CDA
Registration facility repository not available for use.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 97

98 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Folders (WRKFLR)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Folders (WRKFLR) command allows you to display and work with the word processing
function of OfficeVision to show the Work with Folders display. From this display, you can optionally
create, delete, rename, describe entries; put security on a folder; work with documents; or work with
folder authority.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FLR Folder Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Folder (FLR)
Specifies the name of the folder used on the Work with Folders display.
*ALL A list that consists of all first level folders is displayed.
folder-name
Specify the name of the folder that contains the folders to display.
Top

Examples
WRKFLR FLR(*ALL)

This command allows you to utilize the Work with Folders display. A list of all folders you are
authorized to use is shown.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 99

100 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Font Resources (WRKFNTRSC)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Font Resources (WRKFNTRSC) command allows you to work with all of the font resource
space objects from the system or user libraries (or both).
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FNTRSC Font resource Qualified object name Optional,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Font resource Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL
OBJATR Object attribute *ALL, CDEFNT, CDEPAG, FNTCHRSET Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Font resource (FNTRSC)

Specifies the name and library of the font resource to work with. A specific font resource or a generic font
resource can be specified. Either type can be optionally qualified by a library name.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched for font resources to work with. If no library is
specified as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 101

 QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
library-name
Specify a library name. Only the library named in this parameter is searched for font resources to
work with.

The possible values are:

*ALL All font resources are to be worked with.
font-resource-name
Specify the name of the font resource to work with.
generic*-font-resource-name
Specify the generic name of the font resources to work with. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
font resources that have names with the same prefix as the generic font resource name are
worked with.
Top

Object attribute (OBJATR)

Specifies the type of font resource whose attributes are shown.

The possible values are:

*ALL Font resources with all attributes are shown.
CDEFNT
A list of coded fonts is shown.
CDEPAG
A list of code pages is shown.
FNTCHRSET
A list of font character sets is shown.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Searching for Font Resources
WRKFNTRSC FNTRSC(*ALL/GOTHIC*) FNTRSCATR(*ALL)

102 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
This command searches all libraries for the font resources whose first characters are ’GOTHIC’. All font
resource types are shown.

Example 2: Searching for Font Resources

WRKFNTRSC FNTRSC(MYLIB/GOTHIC*) FNTRSCATR(FNTCHRSET)

This command searches library MYLIB for all font resources beginning with the letters ’GOTHIC’. Only
font resources with attribute FNTCHRSET are shown.

Example 3: Searching for Font Resources

WRKFNTRSC FNTRSC(MYLIB/CODEPG3) FNTRSCATR(CDEPAG)

This command searches the library MYLIB for a font resource with the name CODEPG3 and the attribute
CDEPAG.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

Work with Font Resources (WRKFNTRSC) 103

104 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Form Definitions (WRKFORMDF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Form Definitions (WRKFORMDF) command allows you to work with all of the form
definition objects from the system or user libraries (or both).
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FORMDF Form definition Qualified object name Optional,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Form definition Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Form definition (FORMDF)

Specifies the name and library of the form definition to work with. Only those form definitions for which
the user has authority are shown.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched for form definitions to work with. If no library is
specified as the current library for the job, QGPL is used.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 105

 QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
library-name
Specify a library name. Only the library named in this parameter is searched for form definitions
to work with.

The possible values are:

*ALL Specifies all form definitions to work with.
form-definition-name
Specify the name of the form definition to work with.
generic*-form-definition-name
Specify the generic name of the form definition to work with. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified,
then all form definitions that have names with the same prefix as the generic form definition
name are worked with.
Top

Examples
WRKFORMDF FORMDF(*CURLIB/FORMDF1)

This command searches the current library for the form definition FORMDF1. If FORMDF1 does not
exist, the WRKFORMDF panel shows a message indicating that an object matching the specified name
cannot be found.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
Top

106 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Filters (WRKFTR)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Filters (WRKFTR) command allows you to work with and print a list of filters, to change
and delete specified filters, to work with selection and action entries contained in specified filters, and to
create new filters.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have *READ authority are searched.
v Only the filters to which you have authority are shown.
v To perform operations on the filters, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the filters on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FILTER Filter Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Filter Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALL, *ALLUSR

Top

Filter (FILTER)
Specifies the qualified name of the filter that is shown.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, the
QGPL library is used.
*USRLIBL
Only the libraries listed in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 107

 Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
library-name
Specify the name of the library where the filters are located.
*ALL All filters in the specified library are listed.
filter-name
Specify the name of the filter that is shown.
generic*-filter-name
Specify the generic name of the filter. A generic name is a character string of one or more
characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. If a generic name is specified, then all
filters with names that begin with the generic name, and for which you have authority, are
shown. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be
the complete filter name.
Top

Examples
WRKFTR FILTER(MYLIB/MY*)

This command shows a list of filters whose names begin with ’MY’ in library MYLIB. From the list
shown, you can change, delete, or work with the entries in any or all of the filters shown. You can also
create a new filter.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF812F
Filter damaged.
CPF91E8
Internal processing error occurred.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.

108 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPF9807
One or more libraries in library list deleted.
CPF9808
Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
Top

Work with Filters (WRKFTR) 109

110 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Ftr Action Entry (WRKFTRACNE)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Filter Action Entries (WRKFTRACNE) command allows you to display, add, change, copy,
print, rename, or remove action entries in a filter.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FILTER Filter Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Filter Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Filter (FILTER)
Specifies the qualified name of the filter which contains the action entries.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the filter. If no library is specified as the current
library for the job, the QGPL library is used.
library-name
Specify the name of the library where the filter is located.
filter-name
Specify the name of the filter.
Top

Examples
WRKFTRACNE FILTER(MYLIB/MYFILTER)

This command allows you to work with the action entries in filter MYFILTER in library MYLIB.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 111

CPF812F
Filter damaged.
CPF91E8
Internal processing error occurred.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
CPF9807
One or more libraries in library list deleted.
CPF9808
Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
Top

112 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Ftr Selection Entry (WRKFTRSLTE)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Filter Selection Entries (WRKFTRSLTE) command allows you to display, add, change,
copy, print, remove, or move selection entries in a filter.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
FILTER Filter Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Filter Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Filter (FILTER)
Specifies the qualified name of the filter which contains the selection entries.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the filter. If no library is specified as the current
library for the job, the QGPL library is used.
library-name
Specify the name of the library where the filter is located.
filter-name
Specify the name of the filter.
Top

Examples
WRKFTRSLTE FILTER(MYLIB/MYFILTER)

This command allows you to work with the selection entries in filter MYFILTER in library MYLIB.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 113

CPF2150
Object information function failed.
CPF2151
Operation failed for &2 in &1 type *&3.
CPF812F
Filter damaged.
CPF91E8
Internal processing error occurred.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
CPF9807
One or more libraries in library list deleted.
CPF9808
Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
Top

114 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Graphics Symbol Sets (WRKGSS)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Graphics Symbol Sets (WRKGSS) command allows you to show a list of available
graphics symbol sets from one or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the graphics symbol sets to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the graphics symbol sets, you must have *USE authority to the command
used by the operation, and the appropriate authority to the graphics symbol sets on which the
operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
GSS Graphics symbol set Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Graphics symbol Generic name, name, *ALL
set
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Graphics symbol set (GSS)

Specifies the graphics symbol sets to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Graphics symbol set

*ALL All graphics symbol sets are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the graphics symbol sets to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all graphics symbol sets that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
shown.
name Specify the name of the graphics symbol set to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 115

*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKGSS GSS(LIB01/ABC*)

This command allows you to display and work with a list of graphics symbol sets which have names
that begin with ’ABC’ and are stored in library LIB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

116 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Hardware Products (WRKHDWPRD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Hardware Products (WRKHDWPRD) command displays a menu which allows you to
display or change configuration description label locations.

There are no parameters for this command.

The menu has two options:

v Display description label locations.
v Change description label locations.

If the Display description label locations option is chosen, you can display or print a current list of the
information on configuration description label locations.

If the Change description label locations option is chosen, you can change information on the
configuration description label locations. You can also use this option to print the configuration
description label change list work sheet.

Error messages for WRKHDWPRD

*ESCAPE Messages
SUU4074
Internal objects not usable.
SUU4075
Internal failure in WRKHDWPRD command.
Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
None
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
SUU4074
Internal objects not usable.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 117

SUU4075
Internal failure in WRKHDWPRD command.
Top

118 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows the user to manage the hardware
on the system. It allows the user to work with:
v Storage
v Processors
v Coupled adapter resource information
v Communications
v Cryptographics
v Local work stations
v Local area network (LAN) adapters

For storage, processors, communications, cryptographic and local work station you can review status and
related configuration descriptions, determine which resources can be configured, and determine which
devices have configuration descriptions already created.

For LAN network adapters (distributed data interface and token-ring) you can create a resource entry in
the system or update the information. LAN adapter information consists of adapter name, adapter
address, adapter description, and line type. If an adapter name is not specified when an adapter entry is
created, the system assigns a name in the form Dnnnnnnnnn, where nnnnnnnnn is the last nine digits of
the adapter address. The Work with LAN Adapters (WRKLANADPT) command allows you to update
token ring adapter information for adapters reporting on a specified line.

Restrictions: The Work with LAN Adapters (WRKLANADPT) command must be run before you can run
this command using TYPE(*LAN); otherwise there is no information to display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
TYPE Type *CMN, *CRP, *CSA, *LAN, *LWS, *PRC, *STG Required,
Positional 1
LINETYPE Line type *ALL, *DDI, *TRN Optional

Top

Type (TYPE)
Specifies the type of hardware resource with which you want to work.

This is a required parameter.

The possible values are:

*CMN The Work with Communication Resources display is shown.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 119
*CRP The Work with Cryptographic Resources display is shown.
*CSA The Work with Coupled Adapter Resources display is shown.
*LAN The Work with LAN Adapter Information display is shown.
*LWS The Work with Local Work Station display is shown.
*STG The Work with Storage Resources display is shown.
*PRC The Work with Processor Resources display is shown.
Top

Line type (LINETYPE)

Specifies the name of the local area network (LAN) to work with.

This parameter is required if TYPE(*LAN) was specified.

The possible values are:

*ALL Both distributed data interface and token-ring network adapter resource information is displayed.
*DDI All distributed data interface adapter resource information is displayed.
*TRN All token-ring network adapter resource information is displayed.
Top

Examples
WRKHDWRSC TYPE(*CMN)

This command adds, changes, copies, removes, or updates the configuration objects associated with
communication hardware resources. The Work with Communication Resources display shows all
communication input/output processors (IOPs), input/output adapters (IOAs), and ports installed on the
system.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF0B17
The WRKHDWRSC command can not be run at this time.
Top

120 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Held Optical Files (WRKHLDOPTF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Held Optical Files (WRKHLDOPTF) command displays a list of held optical files and
provides options to save, release, and display usage information about the held optical files. For more
information on held optical files, refer to the Optical Support, SC41-4310 book.

Restrictions:
1. To use this command you must have *USE authority to the authorization list securing the volume
associated with the held optical files.
2. To save the held file, you must have *CHANGE authority to the authorization list of the volume to
which the file is saved.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
VOL Volume identifier Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the volume identifier where the optical files were to be stored, had they not been held. This is
the volume identifier that was specified when the files were opened.
*ALL All held optical files on the system for all optical volumes are listed.
volume-identifier
Specify the volume identifier of the volume that was specified when the files were opened.
generic*-volume-identifier
Specify the generic name of the volume identifier to be listed. A generic name is a character
string of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk
substitutes for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin
with the generic prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the
generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
Top

Examples
WRKHLDOPTF

This command displays a list of all held optical files for all optical volumes and provides options to save,
release, and display usage information about the held optical files.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 121

 Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
OPT1234
Held file can not be saved.
OPT1239
Error saving held optical files.
OPT1342
Invalid volume identifier specified.
OPT2301
Internal system object in use.
Top

122 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Image Catalogs (WRKIMGCLG)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Image Catalogs (WRKIMGCLG) command is used to work with the image catalogs that
exist on the system. The WRKIMGCLG command allows the user to specify a specific catalog name, a
generic name, or *ALL. The WRKIMGCLG command allows the user to perform the following functions
on the image catalogs:
Select This option allows the user to work with the image catalog entries in the image catalog.
Change
This option allows the user to change the attributes of the image catalog.
Delete This option allows the user to delete the image catalog.
Load This option allows the user to load the image catalog into a virtual optical device.
Unload
This option allows the user to unload the image catalog from the virtual optical device.

Restrictions:
v You must have security administrator (*SECADM) and all object (*ALLOBJ) special authorities to use
this command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
IMGCLG Image catalog Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Image catalog (IMGCLG)

Specifies the image catalogs to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

*ALL All image catalogs are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the image catalogs to be shown. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
image catalogs that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the image catalog to be shown.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 123

Examples
Example 1: Working with Image Catalogs by Generic Name
WRKIMGCLG IMGCLG(UPGRADE*)

This command displays the Work with Image Catalog panel showing all image catalogs whose names
begin with UPGRADE.

Example 2: Working with All Image Catalogs

WRKIMGCLG IMGCLG(*ALL)

This command displays the Work with Image Catalog panel showing all image catalogs that exist.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPFBC45
Image catalog &1 not found.
Top

124 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Catalog Entries (WRKIMGCLGE)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Image Catalog Entries (WRKIMGCLGE) command is used to work with the images in the
specified image catalog. The WRKIMGCLGE command allows the user to perform the following
functions on images in the image catalog:
Add This option allows the user to add an optical image to the image catalog.
Change
This option allows the user to change the index number or text of an image in the image catalog.
Remove
This option allows the user to remove an optical image from the image catalog.
Load This option allows the user to load an optical image into the virtual optical device. Only images
that have a status of unloaded can be loaded.
Unload
This option allows the user to unload an optical image from the virtual optical device. Only
images that have a status of loaded can be unloaded.
Mount
This option allows the user to mount an optical image into the virtual optical device and activate
it. Only images that have a status of loaded can be mounted.

Restrictions:
v You must have security administrator (*SECADM) and all object (*ALLOBJ) special authorities to use
this command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
IMGCLG Image catalog Name Required,
Positional 1

Top

Image catalog (IMGCLG)

Specify the image catalog to work with.

This is a required parameter.

name Specify the name of the image catalog.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 125

Examples
Example 1: Working with Image Catalog Entires for MYCLG
WRKIMGCLGE IMGCLG(MYCLG)

This command displays the Work with Catalog Entries panel showing the images in the image catalog
MYCLG.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPFBC45
Image catalog &1 not found.
Top

126 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with IPX Descriptions (WRKIPXD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with IPX Descriptions (WRKIPXD) command shows the Work with IPX Descriptions display,
which provides an interactive interface to IPX description functions.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
IPXD IPX description Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

IPX description (IPXD)

Specifies the IPX descriptions that you want to work with.
*ALL All IPX descriptions are listed.
IPX-description-name
Specify the name of the IPX description that you want to work with.
generic*-IPX-description-name
Specify the generic name of the IPX description. A generic name is a character string of one or
more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes for any
valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the generic
prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix)
name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
Top

Examples
WRKIPXD IPXD(IPXDESC)

This command shows the Work with IPX Descriptions display with an entry for IPX description
IPXDESC. If IPXDESC does not exist, no entries are displayed.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 127

128 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Job (WRKJOB)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Job (WRKJOB) command allows you to work with or change the following information
concerning a user job:
v Job status attributes
v Job definition attributes
v Job run attributes
v Spooled file information
v Job log information
v Call stack information
v Job lock information
v Library list information
v Open file information
v File override information
v Commitment control status
v Communications status
v Activation group information
v Mutex information
v Thread information
v Media library attribute information

The information for the following options can be shown only when the job is active: job run attributes,
call stack information, job lock information, library list information, job log information, open file
information, file override information, commitment control status, communications status, activation
group information, mutex information, and thread information.

The following options can be found regardless of whether the user’s job is on the job queue, on an output
queue, or active in the system: job status attributes, job definition attributes, and spooled file information.
Note, however, that the job is not considered to be in the system until all of its input has been completely
read in; only then is an entry placed on the job queue.

Restrictions:
1. The issuer of the command must be running under a user profile which is the same as the job user
identity of the job being worked with, or the issuer of the command must be running under a user
profile which has job control (*JOBCTL) special authority.
The job user identity is the name of the user profile by which a job is known to other jobs. More
information about the job user identity is in the Work Management information in the iSeries
Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.
2. Activation group information for a job cannot be shown if the job is being held when this command
is run.
3. This command fails in a job that allows multiple threads if OPTION(*FILOVR) or OPTION(*ALL) is
specified.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 129

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JOB Job name Single values: * Optional,
Other values: Qualified job name Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Job name Name
Qualifier 2: User Name
Qualifier 3: Number 000000-999999
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2
OPTION Option *SELECT, *STSA, *DFNA, *RUNA, *SPLF, *JOBLOG, Optional
*PGMSTK, *JOBLCK, *LIBL, *OPNF, *FILOVR, *CMTCTL,
*CMNSTS, *ACTGRP, *MUTEX, *THREAD, *MLBA, *ALL
DUPJOBOPT Duplicate job option *SELECT, *MSG Optional

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the name of the user job whose information is being worked with.

Single values
* The job whose information is displayed is the job from which this display command is run.

Qualifier 1: Job name

name Specify the name of the job to be displayed. If no job qualifier is given, all of the jobs currently in
the system are searched for the simple job name. If duplicates of the specified name are found, a
list of messages containing the qualified job names of all duplicates is displayed.

Qualifier 2: User
name Specify the name that identifies the user profile under which the job is run.

Qualifier 3: Number
000000-999999
Specify the job number assigned by the system.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

130 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Option (OPTION)
Specifies which information is being worked with.
*SELECT
The menu is shown and all options and function keys are available.
*STSA
The identifying characteristics and the status of the job are shown.
*DFNA
The definition attributes in the job description associated with the job are shown.
*RUNA
The run attributes for the job are shown.
*SPLF The spooled files owned by the job are shown. Only those spooled output files which are on
output queues in the library name space of the thread issuing this command will be shown.
*JOBLOG
The commands processed by the job and the messages returned from running those commands
are shown.
*PGMSTK
All information for all programs in the call stack is shown.
*JOBLCK
All external object locks held by the job, including held locks and lock that are being waited for,
are shown.
*LIBL The library list for the thread is shown if the job specified for the Job name (JOB) parameter is
the job from which the command is run. For other jobs, the library list of the initial thread is
shown.
*OPNF
Files that are open for the job and the status of system and user files are shown.
*FILOVR
File overrides at any active call level for the job are shown.
*CMTCTL
The commitment control status of the job is shown.
*CMNSTS
The communications status of the job is shown.
*ACTGRP
The activation groups associated with the job are shown.
*MUTEX
The mutex information associated with the initial thread of the job is shown.
*THREAD
Information about the job’s threads is displayed.
*MLBA
Information about the job’s media library attributes is displayed.
*ALL All options are shown.
Top

Work with Job (WRKJOB) 131

Duplicate job option (DUPJOBOPT)
Specifies the action taken when duplicate jobs are found by this command.
*SELECT
The selection display is shown when duplicate jobs are found during an interactive session.
Otherwise, a message is issued.
*MSG A message is issued when duplicate jobs are found.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Printing the Job’s Information
WRKJOB JOB(SMITH/PAYROLL) OUTPUT(*PRINT)

This command prints information for the job named PAYROLL submitted by the user named SMITH to
the job’s output spooling queue.

Example 2: Working with the Current Job’s Spooled Output

WRKJOB OPTION(*SPLF)

This command allows you to work with the spooled output for the current job.

Example 3: Working with All of the Current Job’s Information

WRKJOB OPTION(*ALL)

This command allows you to work with all of the information for the current job.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF0941
Job &3/&2/&1 no longer in system.
CPF1069
End of duplicate names.
CPF1070
Job &3/&2/&1 not found.
CPF1071
No authority to job &3/&2/&1.
CPF2443
Job log not displayed or listed because job has ended.
CPF3330
Necessary resource not available.
CPF3336
Job &5/&4/&3 no longer in the system.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.

132 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9850
Override of printer file &1 not allowed.
CPF9851
Overflow value for file &1 in &2 too small.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

Work with Job (WRKJOB) 133

134 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Job Descriptions (WRKJOBD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Job Descriptions (WRKJOBD) command shows a list of job descriptions and allows you to
change, copy, delete, and display specified job descriptions.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the job descriptions tables to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) authority to the job description and *USE authority to the
library in which the job description is located.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JOBD Job description Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Job description Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Job description (JOBD)

Specifies the job descriptions to be shown on the Work with Job Descriptions display.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Job description

*ALL All job descriptions are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the job descriptions to be shown. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
job descriptions that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the job description to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 135

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKJOBD JOBD(MYLIB/SPEC*)

This command shows a list of job descriptions whose names begin with ’SPEC’ and are stored in library
MYLIB. Options may be selected from this panel to work with the job descriptions that are listed.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

136 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Job Queues (WRKJOBQ) command shows the overall status of all job queues or the
detailed status of a specific job queue. Also, this command allows the user to work with the overall status
of all job queues that match the qualified generic name specified. The status of the queues may change
while the command is being run.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JOBQ Job queue Single values: *ALL Optional,
Other values: Qualified object name Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Job queue Generic name, name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *ALL
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies that all job queues are to be displayed, or specifies the name of a job queue whose status is to
be displayed.

Note: When a generic job queue name is specified and qualified with a library name, the overall status of
all the job queues that match the generic name is shown even if there is only one job queue that matches
the generic name.

The possible values are:

*ALL Status of all job queues is displayed with information about each job queue. If *ALL is specified,
no value can be specified for a library name because *ALL provides a list of all job queues in
every library on the system.
job-queue-name
Specify the name of the job queue for which detailed status information is displayed. A list of all
jobs on the job queue is displayed with information about each job.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 137

library-name
Specify the library where the job queue is located.

Note: When *ALL is specified for the library, the overall status of the job queues is shown even if only
one job queue is found.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.

The possible values are:

* If the request is made by a work station user, the output is displayed. If the request is from a
batch job, the output is printed.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Displaying Status Information of a Specific Job Queue
WRKJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QBATCH)

This command shows the detailed status information about the job queue named QBATCH in the QGPL
library. Each job on the QBATCH job queue is identified by job name, user name, and job number; the
job’s priority and status are also shown.

Example 2: Searching for Job Queues Using a Generic Name

WRKJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QBAT*)

This command allows the user to show and work with the overall status information of the job queues
whose names start with ’QBAT’ and exist in the QGPL library.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2207
Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.
CPF3302
Override of print file &1 to file &2 not valid.
CPF3307
Job queue &1 in &2 not found.
CPF3330
Necessary resource not available.
CPF7D41
Error occurred while logging order assistance request.

138 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPF7D42
Error occurred while performing database operation.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) 139

140 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command allows you to work with an entry,
entries, or generic entries in the job schedule. Each job schedule entry contains the information needed to
automatically submit a batch job once or at regularly scheduled intervals.

This command shows the Work with Job Schedule Entries display. From the display, you can select
options to add, change, remove, hold, or release entries. You can display details of an entry, or work with
the last job submitted for an entry. You can also select an option to immediately submit a job using the
information contained in the job schedule entry.

Restrictions:
1. To use this command, you must have:
v Use (*USE) authority to object QDFTJOBSCD, type *JOBSCD, in library QUSRSYS and execute
(*EXECUTE) authority to library QUSRSYS.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JOB Job name Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional
PRTFMT Print format *BASIC, *FULL Optional
SEQ Sequence *JOB, *DATETIME, *JOBQ Optional
SCDBY Scheduled by user Name, *ALL Optional
SBMDATE Submit date Date, *ALL, *CURRENT Optional
JOBQ Job queue Single values: *ALL Optional
Other values: Qualified object name
Qualifier 1: Job queue Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Job name (JOB)

Specifies the job name of the job schedule entries with which you want to work.
*ALL All job schedule entries matching this command’s other parameter values are shown on the
display.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the job schedule entry. A generic name is a character string of one or
more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. If a generic name is specified,

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 141

 then all entries with job names that begin with the generic name are displayed. If an asterisk is
not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete job name.
name Specify the name of the job schedule entry you want to display.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

Print format (PRTFMT)

Specifies the format used for the printed output.
*BASIC
The entries are printed in an abbreviated list format.
*FULL The details of each entry are printed in an expanded format.
Top

Sequence (SEQ)
Specifies the order in which the selected entries are shown.
*JOB Entries are shown in alphabetical order by job name. Within a job name the entries are ordered
by entry number from lowest to highest.
*DATETIME
Entries are ordered by the date and time at which their jobs are scheduled to be submitted, with
the earliest entries shown first. Entries that do not have a job scheduled to be submitted are
shown last.
*JOBQ
The entries are grouped under the name of the job queue to which their jobs are submitted. The
job queues are shown in alphabetical order. Within a job queue, entries are shown in alphabetical
order.
Top

Scheduled by user (SCDBY)

Specifies the name of the user who added the entry to be shown.
*ALL Entries added by all users are shown.
name Specify the name of the user who added the entries to be shown.
Top

142 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Submit date (SBMDATE)
Specifies the date on which the entries to be shown submit jobs to run.
*ALL All job schedule entries are shown, regardless of the date on which the entries are to submit a job
to run.
*CURRENT
The entries scheduled to submit jobs on the current date are shown.
date Specify the submit date for the entries to be shown.
Top

Job queue (JOBQ)

Specifies the name of the job queue to which the jobs are submitted. This parameter is used to display all
entries that submit jobs to a specified job queue.

Single values
*ALL All entries are shown, regardless of the job queues.

Qualifier 1: Job queue

name Specify the name of the job queue.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the thread’s library list are searched until a match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is used to locate the object. If no library is specified as the
current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.
name Specify the library where the job queue is located.
Top

Examples
WRKJOBSCDE JOBQ(QGPL/QBATCH)

This command shows all the job schedule entries that submit a job to the job queue QBATCH in library
QGPL.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF1628
Job schedule entry &3 number &4 not found.
CPF1629
Not authorized to job schedule &1.

Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) 143

CPF1630
Not authorized to job schedule entry &3 number &4.
CPF1632
Job schedule entry &3 number &4 damaged.
CPF1637
Job schedule &1 in library &2 in use.
CPF1638
Job schedule entry &3 number &4 in use.
CPF1640
Job schedule &1 in library &2 does not exist.
CPF1641
Job schedule &1 in library &2 damaged.
Top

144 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Journal (WRKJRN)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Journals (WRKJRN) command shows you a menu from which options for journal
operations can be selected. From the primary menu, options can be selected to:
v Display the status of the journal
v Do forward and back-out file recovery
v Recover damaged journals and journal receivers
v Associate journal receivers with a journal.

All of these options are supported for local journals. For remote journals, only the associate journal
receivers option is supported.

See the Journal Management information in the iSeries Information Center at

http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter for details on the specific options.

Restrictions:
v The file must not be journaling changes to another journal.
v Overrides are not applied to files specified on the FILE parameter.
v The maximum number of objects that can be associated with one journal is 250,000. This maximum
includes all objects whose changes are currently being journaled (database files, database file members,
data queues, data areas, and integrated file system objects) and journal receivers that are associated
with the journal. If the number of objects is larger than this maximum, journaling does not start.
v This command cannot be used on or with a remote journal.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKJRN

This command displays the Select Journal Name panel. Once a journal name and library are selected, the
Work with Journals panel is shown.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 145

CPF705D
Option not valid for remote journal.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

146 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Journal Attributes (WRKJRNA)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Journal Attributes (WRKJRNA) command displays the creation and operational attributes
of a journal, including the names of the journal receivers currently attached to the journal. From the
primary display, options or functions can be selected to display the names of all objects currently
journaled to the journal, the names of all database files currently having their access paths journaled, the
names of all remote journals currently associated with this journal and detailed information about a
remote journal, the receiver directory, or detailed information about a journal receiver; or to delete
receivers from the receiver directory.

If output is printed with the job’s spooled printer output, then all of the information that is optionally
displayed is printed, except for:
v Detailed information about journal receivers; for that information, use the Display Journal Receiver
Attributes (DSPJRNRCVA) command.
v Detailed information about the relational database directory entries associated with any remote
journals.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JRN Journal Single values: *INTSYSJRN Required,
Other values: Qualified object name Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Journal Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2
JRNID Journal identification Character value Optional
number

Top

Journal (JRN)
Specifies the journal whose attributes are to be displayed.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal
*INTSYSJRN
The internal system journal associated with the journal specified on the JRNID parameter is used.
Internal system journals are not stored in libraries.
Note: You must have all object (*ALLOBJ) special authority to specify JRN(*INTSYSJRN).
Note: If the *INTSYSJRN value is specified, the JRNID parameter must be specified.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 147

journal-name
Specify the name of the journal.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the
job, QGPL is used.
library-name
Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is shown (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled output
(if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

File QPDSPJNA is used for printed output.

Top

Journal identification number (JRNID)

Specifies the five-character journal identification number (ID) of the internal system journal (*INTSYSJRN)
to be displayed. Journal IDs are assigned by the system. The first two characters represent the journal
type, and the last three characters are the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) identifier.

Note: The JRNID parameter can be specified only if JRN(*INTSYSJRN) is specified.

Following is a listing of journal types:

Journal Types
10 System-managed access-path protection (SMAPP)
20 Directory
30 Spool
Top

Examples
WRKJRNA JRN(MYLIB/JRNLA)

This command allows you to work with the current journal attributes of JRNLA in library MYLIB.
Top

148 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF70FF
Internal system journal function failed.
CPF701B
Journal recovery of an interrupted operation failed.
CPF702C
An attached receiver has previously been destroyed.
CPF706B
Not authorized to specify JRN(*INTSYSJRN).
CPF706C
Value &1 for JRNID parameter not valid.
CPF708D
Journal receiver found logically damaged.
CPF9801
Object &2 in library &3 not found.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
CPF9875
Resources exceeded on ASP &1.
Top

Work with Journal Attributes (WRKJRNA) 149

150 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Journal Receivers (WRKJRNRCV)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Journal Receivers (WRKJRNRCV) command allows you to show a list of journal receivers
from one or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the journal receivers to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the journal receivers, you must have *USE authority to the command used
by the operation, and the appropriate authority to the journal receivers on which the operation is to be
performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
JRNRCV Journal receiver Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Journal receiver Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Journal receiver (JRNRCV)

Specifies the journal receivers to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Journal receiver

*ALL All journal receivers are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the journal receivers to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all journal receivers that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
shown.
name Specify the name of the journal receiver to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 151

*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKJRNRCV JRNRCV(LIB01/ABC*)

This command allows you to display and work with a list of journal receivers whose name begin with
the letters ’ABC’ and are stored in library LIB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

152 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work With LAN Adapters (WRKLANADPT)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Local Area Network Adapters (WRKLANADPT) command shows a list of active local
area network (LAN) adapters.

Notes:
1. To determine whether network adapters are active or inactive, the LAN manager performs a query of
all adapters that are entered in the network adapter file. Adapters that respond to the query are
identified as being active on the network; those that do not respond are identified as being inactive on
the network.
2. Adapters that are not currently entered in the network adapter file are automatically added, and a
default adapter name is assigned. The default adapter name consists of the character D, followed by
the last nine digits of the adapter address.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
LINE Line description Name Required,
Positional 1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional

Top

Line description (LINE)

Specifies the name of the line that is attached to the adapters to be displayed.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 153

Examples
WRKLANADPT LINE(DETBRANCH)

This command displays a list of adapters that are connected to the DETBRANCH line.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF8B68
Line description &23 not found.
CPF8B69
Line description &23 not valid for requested action.
CPF8B72
Change failed. Adapter &29 not found in network adapter file.
CPF8B74
Request to display active adapters failed.
CPF8B75
No adapter entries in network adapter file.
CPF8B76
No functional addresses for adapter.
Top

154 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Libraries (WRKLIB)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Libraries (WRKLIB) command shows a list of libraries and allows you to copy, delete,
display, print, save, restore, change, and clear specified libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the libraries, you must have use (*USE) authority to the command used by
the operation, and the appropriate authority to the libraries on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
LIB Library Qualifier list Optional,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Library Generic name, name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL,
*ALLUSR, *ALL
ASP ASP number 1-32, *ALL Optional
ASPDEV ASP device Name, *, *SYSBAS, *CURASPGRP Optional

Top

Library (LIB)
Specifies the libraries to be shown on the Work with Libraries display.
*LIBL All libraries in the thread’s library list are shown.
Note: A library can appear more than once in the list of libraries shown on the Work with
Libraries display if that library is in the system portion or user portion of the library list and is
also one of the product libraries or the current library for the thread.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are shown. If there is no current library entry, only
the libraries in the user portion of the library list are shown.
Note: A library can appear more than once in the list of libraries shown on the Work with
Libraries display if that library is in the user portion of the library list and is also the current
library for the thread.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is shown. If no library is specified as the current library for the
thread, the QGPL library is shown.
*ALL All the libraries in the auxiliary storage pools (ASPs) specified by the ASP number (ASP)
parameter or the ASP device (ASPDEV) parameter are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 155

*ALLUSR
All user libraries are displayed. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
displayed except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also displayed:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each previous
release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL program for the
previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version, release, and modification
level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the libraries to be shown. A generic name is a character string that
contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
libraries that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the library to be shown.
Top

ASP number (ASP)

Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) for the libraries that should be shown on the Work with
Libraries display. This parameter is ignored when a value of *LIBL, *CURLIB or *USRLIBL is entered for
the library parameter. If a number is specified for this parameter, the ASP device (ASPDEV) parameter
value must be *.
*ALL All ASPs defined by the value for the ASP device (ASPDEV) parameter will be searched.
1-32 Specify the number of the system or basic user ASP to be searched. ASP 1 is the system ASP,
which is always configured. Basic user ASPs are 2-32, and must designate an ASP that is
configured on the system. For information on configuring an ASP, see the Backup and Recovery
book, SC41-5304.
Top

ASP device (ASPDEV)

Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device name where storage for the library being displayed is
allocated. If the library is in an ASP that is not part of the thread’s library name space, this parameter
must be specified to ensure the correct library is displayed. If a number is specified for the ASP number
(ASP) parameter, the ASPDEV parameter value must be *.
* The ASPs that are currently part of the thread’s library name space will be searched to find the

156 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
 library. This includes the system ASP (ASP 1), all defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32), and, if the
thread has an ASP group, the primary and secondary ASPs in the thread’s ASP group.
*SYSBAS
The system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32) will be searched to find the
library. No primary or secondary ASPs will be searched, even if the thread has an ASP group.
*CURASPGRP
If the thread has an ASP group, the primary and secondary ASPs in the thread’s ASP group will
be searched to find the library. The system ASP (ASP 1) and defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32)
will not be searched. If no ASP group is associated with the thread an error will be issued.
name Specify the device name of the primary or secondary ASP to be searched. The primary or
secondary ASP must have been activated (by varying on the ASP device) and have a status of
’Available’. The system ASP (ASP 1) and configured basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32) will not be
searched.
Top

Examples
WRKLIB LIB(QJ*) ASP(2)

This command allows you to work with a list of libraries in auxiliary storage pool (ASP) 2 that begin
with the letters ’QJ’.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF218C
&1 not a primary or secondary ASP.
CPF2302
Device &1 not found in ASP group &2.
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9814
Device &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
CPF9825
Not authorized to device &1.
CPF9833
*CURASPGRP or *ASPGRPPRI specified and thread has no ASP group.
CPFB8ED
Device description &1 not correct for operation.
Top

Work with Libraries (WRKLIB) 157

158 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with License Information (WRKLICINF)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command allows you to show or print specified
products or features found on the system which contain license information. When no parameters are
specified, a list of all products with license information is shown. This list allows you to change, display,
or print the license information, to reset the peak usage information, or to work with the license users of
a product or feature.

Restriction: This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.

Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
PRDID Product identifier Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Product identifier (PRDID)

Specifies the identifier (ID) of the product for which license information is to be displayed.
*ALL All of the products found on the system which contain license information are displayed.
product-identifier
Specify the seven-character ID of the product for which license information is to be displayed.
generic*-product-identifier
Specify the generic identifier for the products to be displayed. A generic product identifier is
specified in the same manner as a generic name.
A generic name is a character string of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for
example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all
objects with names that begin with the generic prefix for which the user has authority. If an
asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete
object name.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is shown at the requesting work station or printed with
the job’s spooled output.
* The output requested is shown on the display.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 159

*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Showing License Information for a Product
WRKLICINF PRDID(1MYPROD)

This command shows product license information on your display station for the product with product
identifier 1MYPROD.

Example 2: Printing All License Information

WRKLICINF OUTPUT(*PRINT) PRDID(*ALL)

This command prints, with your job’s spooled output, a list of all products on the system which contain
license information.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9E11
License information not retrieved.
CPF9E12
License information not available.
CPF9E24
License user &4 not released.
CPF9E26
&4 license users not released.
Top

160 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Line Descriptions (WRKLIND)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Line Descriptions (WRKLIND) command provides an interactive interface to line
description functions through the Work with Line Descriptions display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
LIND Line description Generic name, name, *ALL, *ASYNC, *BSC, *DDI, *ELAN, Optional,
*FAX, *FR, *IDLC, *NET, *PPP, *SDLC, *TDLC, *TRLAN, Positional 1
*WLS, *X25

Top

Line description (LIND)

Specifies the line description to work with.
*ALL Work with all line descriptions.
*ASYNC
You can work with all lines configured for asynchronous communications.
*BSC You can work with all lines configured for binary synchronous communications.
*DDI The user can work with all lines configured for distributed data interface.
*ELAN
You can work with all lines configured for an Ethernet local area network.
*FAX The user can work with all lines configured for fax communications.
*FR The user can work with all lines configured for frame relay direct communications.
*IDLC You can work with all ISDN Data Link Control (IDLC) lines.
*NET The user can work with all lines configured for network communications.
*PPP The user can work with all lines configured for Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) communications.
*SDLC
You can work with all lines configured for synchronous data link control communications.
*TDLC
You can work with all lines configured for twinaxial data link communications.
*TRLAN
You can work with all lines configured for a token ring local area network.
*WLS The user can work with all lines configured for a wireless local area network.
*X25 You can work with all X.25 lines.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 161

generic-name
Specify a generic line description name.
name Specify the name of a line description.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
Top

Examples
WRKLIND LIND(LINE01)

This command displays the Work with Line Descriptions panel showing an entry for line LINE01. If
LINE01 does not exist, no entries are shown.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

162 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Object Links (WRKLNK)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Object Links (WRKLNK) command shows a list of names of specified objects in
directories and options to work with the objects.

Restrictions:
1. To perform operations on the objects, the user must have use (*USE) authority to the command used
by the operation, and the appropriate authority to the objects on which the operation is to be
performed.

Note: The authority requirements for this command are complex with respect to file systems, object types,
requested operations etc.. Therefore, see the iSeries Security Reference, SC41-5302 book for information
about the required authorities for this command.

For more information about integrated file system commands, see the Integrated file system information
in the iSeries Information Center at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OBJ Object Path name, * Optional,
Positional 1
OBJTYPE Object type *ALL, *ALLDIR, *ALRTBL, *AUTL, *BLKSF, *BNDDIR, Optional
*CFGL, *CHTFMT, *CHRSF, *CLD, *CLS, *CMD, *CNNL,
*COSD, *CRG, *CRQD, *CSI, *CSPMAP, *CSPTBL, *CTLD,
*DDIR, *DEVD, *DIR, *DOC, *DSTMF, *DTAARA,
*DTADCT, *DTAQ, *EDTD, *EXITRG, *FCT, *FIFO, *FILE,
*FLR, *FNTRSC, *FNTTBL, *FORMDF, *FTR, *GSS,
*IGCDCT, *IGCSRT, *IGCTBL, *IMGCLG, *IPXD, *JOBD,
*JOBQ, *JOBSCD, *JRN, *JRNRCV, *LIB, *LIND,
*LOCALE, *MBR, *MEDDFN, *MENU, *MGTCOL,
*MODD, *MODULE, *MSGF, *MSGQ, *M36, *M36CFG,
*NODGRP, *NODL, *NTBD, *NWID, *NWSD, *OOPOOL,
*OUTQ, *OVL, *PAGDFN, *PAGSEG, *PDG, *PGM,
*PNLGRP, *PRDAVL, *PRDDFN, *PRDLOD, *PSFCFG,
*QMFORM, *QMQRY, *QRYDFN, *RCT, *SBSD, *SCHIDX,
*SOCKET, *SPADCT, *SQLPKG, *SQLUDT, *SRVPGM,
*SSND, *STMF, *SVRSTG, *SYMLNK, *S36, *TBL,
*TIMZON, *USRIDX, *USRPRF, *USRQ, *USRSPC,
*VLDL, *WSCST
DETAIL Detail *PRV, *NAME, *BASIC, *EXTENDED Optional
DSPOPT Display option *PRV, *USER, *ALL Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 163

Object (OBJ)
Specifies which objects are shown.
* All objects in the current directory are displayed.
object-path-name
Specify the name of the object or a pattern to match the name(s) of the object(s) to be shown. The
object path name can be either a simple name or a name that is qualified with the name of the
directory in which the object is located. A pattern can be specified in the last part of the path
name. An asterisk (*) matches any number of characters and a question mark (?) matches a single
character. If the path name is qualified or contains a pattern, it must be enclosed in apostrophes.
For more information on specifying path names, refer to ″Object naming rules″ in ″CL concepts
and reference″ in the CL concepts and reference topic in the iSeries Information Center at
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.
Top

Object type (OBJTYPE)

Specifies the type of objects to display.
*ALL All objects whose name matches the pattern specified in the Object (OBJ) parameter are
displayed.
*ALLDIR
All directory types (DIR, LIB, FLR, database FILE) are displayed.
object-type
Specify the type of object matching the name pattern that is to be displayed.
To see a complete list of object types when prompting this command, position the cursor on the
field for this parameter and press F4 (Prompt). For a description of the object types, see ″Object
types″ in the CL concepts and reference topic in the iSeries Information Center at
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.
Top

Detail (DETAIL)
Specifies how much information is to be displayed on the Work with Object Links (WRKLNK) list.
*PRV The same information that was displayed when the user ran this command previously is shown.
The value *BASIC is used if the user has not used this command or the Display Object Links
(DSPLNK) command.
*NAME
Only the name is displayed.
*BASIC
The name is displayed along with the type, type attribute, and text.
*EXTENDED
In addition to the basic information noted above, the type field is extended to show more
information about symbolic links and an additional option is displayed to work with hard or
symbolic links.
Top

164 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Display option (DSPOPT)
Specifies whether to display PC system and hidden objects.
*PRV The same value is used for this parameter as the previous time the user ran this command. If this
command has not been used before, *USER is used.
*USER
The PC system and the hidden objects are not displayed. Objects beginning with a period (.) are
not shown unless the specified pattern begins with a period (.).
*ALL All objects, including the PC system and hidden objects, are displayed. Objects beginning with a
period (.) are shown (with asterisk (*) specified for the pattern) including the directory (.) and
parent directory (..) entries.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Working with an Object Link
WRKLNK OBJ(’X/PAY’)

This command displays the Work with Object Links panel. This panel shows a list of names of objects in
a directory and provides options for performing operations on those objects. In this example, the object’s
name is PAY and is located in directory X in the current directory.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9899
Error occurred during processing of command.
CPFA085
Home directory not found for user &1.
CPFA0A7
Path name too long.
CPFA0A9
Object not found. Object is &1.
Top

Work with Object Links (WRKLNK) 165

166 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with MLB Resource Queue (WRKMLBRSCQ)
Where allowed to run: Parameters
v Interactive job (*INTERACT) Examples
Error messages
v Interactive program (*IPGM)
v Interactive ILE CL module (*IMOD)
v Interactive REXX procedure (*IREXX)
Threadsafe: No

The Work with MLB Resource Queue (WRKMLBRSCQ) command allows a user to work with the
resource allocation requests for the specified media library device.

Restrictions:
1. The job being changed must use the same user profile as the user issuing the command, or the issuer
must have job control special authority (*JOBCTL).
2. Only a user with job control special authority (*JOBCTL) can change the resource allocation priority.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MLB Library device Name Required,
Positional 1

Top

Library device (MLB)

Specifies the media library device to work with.
Top

Examples
WRKMLBRSCQ MLB(TAPMLB01)

This command displays a list of requests to use a resource in tape media library TAPMLB01.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF6708
Command ended due to error.
CPF6745
Device &1 not a media library device.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 167

CPF9814
Device &1 not found.
CPF9825
Not authorized to device &1.
Top

168 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Media Library Status (WRKMLBSTS)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Media Library Status (WRKMLBSTS) command is used to display and work with media
library status functions. When this command is run, the Work with Media Library Status display is
shown. This display shows status information for library configuration descriptions. All associated drive
resources are shown for each library device description selected.

Options available on the Work with Media Library Status display are to vary status and to work with
device descriptions. For tape media library devices, options are also available to allocate and reset drive
resources within the device.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MLB Library device Generic name, name, *ALL, *OPTMLB, *TAPMLB, Optional,
*RSRCNAME Positional 1
RSRCNAME Resource name Name, *NONE Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Library (MLB)
Specifies the descriptions shown on the Work with Media Library Status display.
*ALL All media library descriptions are shown.
*OPTMLB
All optical media library descriptions are shown.
*TAPMLB
All tape media library descriptions are shown.
*RSRCNAME
All media library descriptions which have the specified resource name (RSRCNAME parameter)
are shown.
generic*-description-name
Specify the generic name of the description. A generic name is a character string of one or more
characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes for any valid
characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the generic prefix for
which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the
system assumes it to be the complete object name.
description-name
Specify a media library device description to be shown.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 169

Resource name (RSRCNAME)
Specifies the resource name that identifies the hardware that the description represents.
*NONE
No resource name is specified at this time.
resource-name
Specify the name that identifies the media library device hardware on the system.
Top

Examples
WRKMLBSTS MLB(*ALL)

This command displays the Work with Media Library Status panel, which shows the status for all media
library devices.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

170 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Menus (WRKMNU)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Menus (WRKMNU) command shows a list of menus and allows you to delete, change, go
to, or display the attributes for the specified menus.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the menus to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the menus, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the menus on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MENU Menu Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Menu Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Menu (MENU)
Specifies the menus to be shown on the Work with Menus display.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Menu
*ALL All menus are listed.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the menus to be shown. A generic name is a character string that
contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
menus that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the menu to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 171

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKMNU PERSLIB/OE*

This command displays the Work with Menus panel, which shows the list of all menus in library
PERSLIB whose names begin with the letters ’OE’.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

172 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Module (WRKMOD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Modules (WRKMOD) command allows you to display and work with a list of modules
from one or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority are searched.
v Only the modules to which you have read (*READ) authority are shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the modules, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the modules on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MODULE Module Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Module Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL
MODATR Module attribute *ALL, CBLLE, CLE, CLLE, CPPLE, RPGLE Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Module (MODULE)
Specifies how to search for modules to be placed in the list. All modules with names that correspond to
the specified parameter value, and for which the user has authority, are shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Module
*ALL All modules in the libraries identified in the library qualifier are shown (except those libraries for
which the user does not have authority).
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the module. A generic name is a character string of one or more
characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. If a generic name is specified, then all
modules with names that begin with the generic name, and for which the user has authority, are
shown. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be
the complete module name.
name Specify the name of the module shown.

Qualifier 2: Library

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 173

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the
job, the QGPL library is used.
*USRLIBL
Only the libraries in the user portion of the job’s library list are searched.
*ALL All libraries in the system portion of the job’s library list, including QSYS, are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Module attribute (MODATR)

Specifies that a list of modules with the selected attribute is shown.
*ALL Modules are shown regardless of the attribute associated with the module.
CBLLE
Modules with the CBL attribute (ILE COBOL modules) are shown.
CLE Modules with the C attribute (ILE C modules) are shown.
CLLE Modules with the CL attributes (ILE CL modules) are shown.
CPPLE
Modules with the CPPLE attribute (ILE C++ modules) are shown.
RPGLE
Modules with the RPG attribute (ILE RPG modules) are shown.
Top

174 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Examples
WRKMOD MODULE(MYLIB/*ALL)

This command lists all the modules to which the user has authority that are stored in library MYLIB.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

Work with Module (WRKMOD) 175

176 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Mode Descriptions (WRKMODD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Mode Descriptions (WRKMODD) command allows you to work with mode description
functions through the Work with Mode Descriptions display.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MODD Mode description Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Mode description (MODD)

Specifies the mode description to work with.
*ALL Work with all mode descriptions.
generic-mode-description-name
Specify a generic mode description name.

Note: A generic name is specified as a character string that contains one or more characters followed by
an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, then all objects that have names with the same prefix as the
generic object name are selected.
mode-description-name
Specify the name of specific mode description.
Top

Examples
WRKMODD MODD(*ALL)

This command displays the Work with Mode Descriptions panel, which shows entries for all existing
mode descriptions.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 177

178 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Messages (WRKMSG)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work With Messages (WRKMSG) command is used by the display station user to work with
messages received at a specified message queue.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MSGQ Message queue Single values: *WRKUSR, *SYSOPR, *USRPRF, *WRKSTN Optional,
Other values: Qualified object name Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Message queue Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional
MSGTYPE Message type *ALL, *INFO, *INQ, *COPY Optional
SEV Severity code filter 0-99, 0, *MSGQ Optional
ASTLVL Assistance level *PRV, *USRPRF, *BASIC, *INTERMED Optional

Top

Message queue (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queue from which messages are shown.

Single values
*WRKUSR
Messages from the work station’s message queue and the current user’s user profile message
queue are shown.
*SYSOPR
Messages from the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR) are shown.
*WRKSTN
Messages from the work station’s message queue are shown.
*USRPRF
Messages from the current user profile message queue are shown.

Qualifier 1: Message queue

name Specify the name of the message queue from which messages are shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 179

*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the message queue. If no current library entry
exists in the library list, QGPL is used.
name Specify the library where the message queue is located.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is shown (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled output
(if requested by a batch job). Immediate messages and predefined messages are truncated to 105
characters when printed.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

When the output is printed, two lines are printed for each message. The second line contains the
following information:
v Qualified job name of the job that sent the message. This consists of the following three fields:
– Job name
– User name
– Job number
v Name of the program that sent the message
v Instruction number in program that sent the message. For non-program message queues this is always
zeroes.
v The date and time the message was sent.
v The name of the user profile that the thread was running under when the message was sent.

Top

Message type (MSGTYPE)

Specifies the type of messages in the message queue that are shown.
*ALL All messages that are in the message queue are shown.
*INFO
Only informational messages (those not requiring a reply) are shown.
*INQ Only inquiry messages (those requiring a reply) are shown.
*COPY
A copy of each sender’s message that was sent to another message queue and required a reply is
shown.
Top

180 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Severity code filter (SEV)
Specifies the lowest severity code value that a message can have and be shown. If the message’s severity
code is lower than the value specified here, the message is not shown.
0 All messages in the specified message queue are shown.
*MSGQ
All messages having a severity code greater than or equal to the severity code specified for the
message queue are shown.
severity-code
Specify the lowest severity code value that a message can have and still be shown. Valid values
range from 00 through 99.
Top

Assistance level (ASTLVL)

Specifies which user interface to display.
*PRV The previous user interface used is displayed.
*USRPRF
The user interface stored in the current user profile is used.
*BASIC
The Work with Messages display is shown. This user interface separates messages into two
categories: 1) messages requiring a reply and 2) messages not requiring a reply. New messages
are shown at the top of each message list.
*INTERMED
The Display Messages display is shown.
Top

Examples
WRKMSG

This command displays all messages from the requester’s work station message queue and user profile
message queue. Messages needing a reply are displayed first, followed by messages not needing a reply.
Messages are displayed from newest to oldest.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2203
User profile &1 not correct.
CPF2204
User profile &1 not found.
CPF2217
Not authorized to user profile &1.

Work with Messages (WRKMSG) 181

CPF2225
Not able to allocate internal system object.
CPF2401
Not authorized to library &1.
CPF2403
Message queue &1 in &2 not found.
CPF2408
Not authorized to message queue &1.
CPF2433
Function not allowed for system log message queue &1.
CPF2450
Work station message queue &1 not allocated to job.
CPF2451
Message queue &1 is allocated to another job.
CPF2477
Message queue &1 currently in use.
CPF2513
Message queue &1 cannot be displayed.
CPF2537
Too many records written to file &2 in &3.
CPF8127
&8 damage on message queue &4 in &9. VLIC log-&7.
CPF8176
Message queue for device description &4 damaged.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
Top

182 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Message Descriptions (WRKMSGD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Message Descriptions (WRKMSGD) command shows detailed information about the
messages contained in a message file. This command can be used to add, change, remove, and print
message descriptions through the Work with Message Descriptions display. When message descriptions
are changed by using this display, the current values for the message are shown in the command prompt.
However, there is a 512-character limit for the second-level message text.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MSGID Message identifier Name, *FIRST Optional,
Positional 1
MSGF Message file Qualified object name Optional,
Positional 2
Qualifier 1: Message file Name, QCPFMSG
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Top

Message identifier (MSGID)

Specifies the message identifier with which to begin showing a list of message descriptions in the
message file specified for the Message file (MSGF) parameter.
*FIRST
The first message description in the message file is used to begin the list display.
message-identifier
Specify the message identifiers of one or more messages whose descriptions are to be shown. The
message identifiers must each be 7 characters long and in the following format: pppnnnn
The first 3 characters must be a code consisting of an alphabetic character followed by two
alphanumeric (alphabetic or decimal) characters; the last 4 characters may consist of the decimal
numbers ranging from 0 through 9, and the characters A through F.
Top

Message file (MSGF)

Specifies the message file from which the message descriptions are taken.

Qualifier 1: Message file

QCPFMSG
Message descriptions are taken from the system message file, QCPFMSG.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 183

name Specify the name of the message file from which the message descriptions are taken.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the message file. If no current library entry exists
in the library list, QGPL is used.
name Specify the library where the message file is located.
Top

Examples
WRKMSGD MSGF(QSYS/QCPFMSG)

This command displays the Work with Message Descriptions panel, showing all message descriptions
found in message file QCPFMSG in library QSYS. From that panel, the user can add, change, delete,
display, or print the message descriptions.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2401
Not authorized to library &1.
CPF2407
Message file &1 in &2 not found.
CPF2411
Not authorized to message file &1 in &2.
CPF2483
Message file currently in use.
CPF2499
Message identifier &1 not allowed.
CPF2510
Message file &1 in &2 logically damaged.
CPF2516
Unable to open display or printer file &1 in &2.
CPF9807
One or more libraries in library list deleted.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
Top

184 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Message Files (WRKMSGF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Message Files (WRKMSGF) command allows you to show a list of message files from one
or more libraries.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the message files to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the message files, you must have *USE authority to the command used by
the operation, and the appropriate authority to the message files on which the operation is to be
performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MSGF Message file Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Message file Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Message file (MSGF)

Specifies the message files to be shown.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Message file

*ALL All message files are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the message files to be shown. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
message files that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the message file to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 185

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKMSGF MSGF(ACCNTLIB/*ALL)

This command displays the Work with Message Files panel, showing all the message files in the
ACCNTLIB library.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

186 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Message Queues (WRKMSGQ)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Message Queues (WRKMSGQ) command shows a list of message queues and allows you
to display, change, delete, and clear specified message queues.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the message queues to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the message queues, you must have *USE authority to the command used by
the operation, and the appropriate authority to the message queues on which the operation is to be
performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
MSGQ Message queue Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Message queue Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Message queue (MSGQ)

Specifies the message queues to be shwon on the Work with Message Queues display.

This is a required parameter.

*ALL All message queues are shown.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the message queues to be shown. A generic name is a character
string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is
specified, all message queues that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are
shown.
name Specify the name of the message queue to be listed.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 187

*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKMSGQ MSGQ(PERSLIB/MQ*)

This command displays the Work with Message Queues panel, showing a list of all message queues
whose names begin with the letters ’MQ’ that exist in library PERSLIB.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

188 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work With Nickname (WRKNCK)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Nicknames (WRKNCK) command is used to show a list of nicknames you can work with.
You can add, change, remove, show, print, and rename nicknames in the system distribution directory
with this command.

A nickname is a short version of either a directory entry or a distribution list name. More information
about nicknames is in the SNA Distribution Services book, SC41-5410.

Restriction:
1. You must have security administrator (*SECADM) authority to change, remove, or rename public
nicknames that you do not own. No special authority is needed for you to display public nicknames
or to work with public nicknames that you own.
2. Only the owner can change, remove, rename, or display private nicknames. No special authority is
needed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
ACCESS Access *PRV, *ALL, *PRIVATE, *PUBLIC Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Access (ACCESS)
Specifies the access of the nicknames to be shown.
*PRV The last access specified by the current user for displaying, selecting, or working with nicknames
is used.
*ALL All of the nicknames to which you have access are shown. This includes the private nicknames
that you own and all of the public nicknames in the system distribution directory.
*PRIVATE
The private nicknames that you own are shown.
*PUBLIC
All of the public nicknames in the system distribution directory are shown.
Top

Examples
WRKNCK ACCESS(*PRIVATE)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 189

This command displays the Work with Private Nicknames panel, from which you can add, change,
remove, display, print, and rename your private nicknames.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF8360
Not enough storage for commitment control operation.
CPF9006
User not enrolled in system distribution directory.
CPF905C
Error occurred trying to find a translation table.
CPF9096
Cannot use CMDCHRID(*DEVD), DOCCHRID(*DEVD) in batch job.
CPF9838
User profile storage limit exceeded.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

190 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Network Files (WRKNETF)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Network Files (WRKNETF) command displays or prints a list of files that have arrived
for a user, or creates an output file containing a list of the files. When the list is shown, you can:
v Receive the file into a user file.
v Delete the file.
v Browse the file (not valid for save files).
v Submit files (submit the input stream). (Also not valid for save files).

Restrictions:
1. A user with security officer authority can display the network files for any user. Users other than the
security officer can show only those files that were sent to them or to their group profile.
2. To perform any of the options from this display, you must be authorized to the command
corresponding to that option. For example, you must be authorized to the Display Physical File
Member (DSPPFM) command for the browse function, and the Submit Database Jobs (SBMDBJOB)
command for the submit job function.
3. To perform WRKNETF in debug mode, update of production files must be allowed by specifying
UPDPROD(*YES) on the STRDBG command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
USER User Name, *CURRENT, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT, *OUTFILE Optional,
Positional 2
OUTFILE File to receive output Qualified object name Optional
Qualifier 1: File to receive Name
output
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
OUTMBR Output member options Element list Optional
Element 1: Member to Name, *FIRST
receive output
Element 2: Replace or add *REPLACE, *ADD
records

Top

User (USER)
Specifies the user for whom the files are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 191

*CURRENT
The network files for the current user are shown.
*ALL The network files for all users are shown.
user-name
Specify the name of the specified user whose files are shown.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.

The possible values are:

* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

*OUTFILE
The output is directed to the database file specified for the File to receive output (OUTFILE)
parameter.

Top

File to receive output (OUTFILE)

Specifies the name and library of the database file to which the output of the command is directed. If the
file does not exist, this command creates a database file in the specified library.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current
library for the job, QGPL is used.
library-name
Specify the library where the file is located.
Top

Member to receive output (OUTMBR)

Specifies the name of the database file member that receives the output of the command.

The possible name values are:

*FIRST
The first member in the file receives the output. If it does not exist, the system creates a member
with the name of the file specified on the File to receive output prompt (OUTFILE parameter).

192 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
member-name
Specify the name of the file member that receives the output. If it does not exist, the system
creates it.

The possible values for how information is stored are:

*REPLACE
The system clears the existing member and adds the new records.

*ADD The system adds the new records to the end of the existing records.

Top

Examples
Example 1: Working with User’s Network Files
WRKNETF

This command allows you to work with all network files for the user running this command. If the
command is issued as an interactive job, the list of files is shown at the requesting work station. If the
command is issued as a batch job, the list of files is printed with the job’s spooled output.

Example 2: Printing Output

WRKNETF USER(USR1) OUTPUT(*PRINT)

This command allows you to work with the network files for USR1 and prints the output with the job’s
spooled output. This command can only be issued by USR1, a member of the USR1 group, or a user with
security officer authority.

Example 3: Working with Network Files for All Users

WRKNETF USER(*ALL) OUTPUT(*OUTFILE) OUTFILE(NETFILES)

This command allows you to work with the network files for all users and is written to the first member
of a database named NETFILES. If the file exists in a library on the library list, the existing file is used;
otherwise, the file is created in the QGPL library. If the file did not exist, or did not contain any members,
a member with the same name as the file is added to the file; otherwise, the first member of the file is
cleared and used. This command can be issued only by a user with security officer rights.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2204
User profile &1 not found.
CPF8070
Not allowed to process files for user &1.
CPF9005
System resource required to complete this request not available.

Work with Network Files (WRKNETF) 193

CPF9006
User not enrolled in system distribution directory.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9860
Error occurred during output file processing.
Top

194 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Network Job Entries (WRKNETJOBE)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Network Job Entry (WRKNETJOBE) command shows the network job entries. There is
one entry for each user or distribution group who can submit jobs to this system.

This entry is used to determine whether the input stream is automatically submitted, placed on the queue
of network files for a user, or rejected. This entry also specifies the user profile that is used for checking
the authority to the job description referred by the batch job.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.

The possible values are:

* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.

Top

Examples
Example 1: Printing Output
WRKNETJOBE OUTPUT(*PRINT)

This command allows you to work with the network job entries that are printed with the job’s spooled
output.

Example 2: Working with Network Job Entries

WRKNETJOBE OUTPUT(*)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 195

This command, if issued in an interactive job, allows you to work the network job entries at the
requesting work station. If the command is issued in a batch job, the network job entries are printed with
the job’s spooled output.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF1844
Cannot access network attribute &1.
CPF8050
Network job table could not be accessed.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
Top

196 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Network Table Entry (WRKNETTBLE)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Network Table Entry (WRKNETTBLE) command is used to show a list of network table
entries from which you can add, remove, display, or print the entries. You can also select to print the list.

The network table is used to manage a list of your networks and their associated Internet addresses.

Restrictions:
v You must have input/output system configuration (*IOSYSCFG) special authority to add or remove
entries using this command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NETWORK Network Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Network (NETWORK)
Specifies the network entry with which you want to work.
*ALL All networks in the table are shown or printed.
name Specify the name of the network. All entries that match are shown or printed.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 197

Examples
WRKNETTBLE

This command shows a list of all the network table entries. You can select to add, remove, display, or
print the network table entries from this list.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

198 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Node List (WRKNODL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Node Lists (WRKNODL) command allows the user to work with a list of node list
objects, to create a new node list, delete existing node lists, and to work with node list entries.

Restrictions:
1. Only the libraries to which you have *USE authority are searched.
2. Only the node list to which you have some authority is shown on the display.
3. To perform operations on the node lists, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the node list on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NODL Node list Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Node list Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALL, *ALLUSR

Top

Node list (NODL)

Specifies the qualified name of the node lists that are shown.

The node list name can be qualified by one of the following library values:
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the
job, the QGPL library is used.
*USRLIBL
Only the libraries in the user portion of the job’s library list are searched.
*ALL All libraries in the system portion of the job’s library list, including QSYS, are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 199

 QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
library-name
Specify the name of the library to be searched.

The possible values are:

*ALL All the node lists specified in the library are listed.
node-list-name
Specify the name of the node list being shown.
generic*-node-list-name
Specify the generic name of the node list being shown. A generic name is a character string of
one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk (*) substitutes
for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the
generic prefix, for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic
(prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name. If the complete object name
is specified, and multiple libraries are searched, multiple objects can be returned, only if *ALL or
*ALLUSR library values can be specified for the name.
Top

Examples
WRKNODL NODL(MYLIB/MY*)

This command shows a list of all node lists in library MYLIB whose names begin with the letters ’MY’.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

200 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Node List Entries (WRKNODLE)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Node List Entries (WRKNODLE) command allows the user to display, print, add, or
remove node list entries.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NODL Node list Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Node list Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
ADRTYPE Address type *ALL, *SNA, *IP Optional

Top

Node list (NODL)

Specifies the qualified name of the node list object from which entries are shown.

The node list name can be qualified by one of the following library values:
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the
job, the QGPL library is used.
library-name
Specify the name of the library to be searched.

The possible values are:

node-list-name
Specify the name of the node list to use.

This is a required parameter.

Top

Address type (ADRTYPE)

Specifies the node list entries to work with, by address type.

The possible values are:

*ALL All node list entries are shown.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 201

*IP Only the nodes with an Internet Protocol (IP) address type are shown.
*SNA Only the nodes with a Systems Network Architecture (SNA) address type are shown.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Displaying All Node List Entries
WRKNODLE NODL(MYLIB/NODL02)

This command shows a list of all entries in the node list NODL02 in library MYLIB.

Example 2: Displaying All IP Node List Entries

WRKNODLE NODL(MYLIB/NODL02) ADRTYPE(*IP)

This command shows a list of all IP entries in the node list NODL02 in library MYLIB.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF7D41
Error occurred while logging order assistance request.
CPF7D42
Error occurred while performing database operation.
CPF813E
Node list &4 in &9 damaged.
CPF9801
Object &2 in library &3 not found.
CPF9802
Not authorized to object &2 in &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
CPF9807
One or more libraries in library list deleted.
CPF9808
Cannot allocate one or more libraries on library list.
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
CPF9830
Cannot assign library &1.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.

202 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
 Top

Work with Node List Entries (WRKNODLE) 203

204 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NetBIOS Descriptions (WRKNTBD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with NetBIOS Descriptions (WRKNTBD) command displays the Work with NetBIOS
Descriptions menu, which provides an interactive interface to NetBIOS description functions.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NTBD NetBIOS description Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

NetBIOS description (NTBD)

Specifies the NetBIOS descriptions to work with.
*ALL The user can work with all NetBIOS descriptions.
generic*-NetBIOS-description-name
Specify the generic name of the NetBIOS description. A generic name is a character string of one
or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes for any
valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the generic
prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix)
name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
NetBIOS-description-name
Specify the name of the NetBIOS description to work with.
Top

Examples
WRKNTBD NTBD(MYNETBIOS)

This command displays the Work with NetBIOS Descriptions panel, showing an entry for NetBIOS
description MYNETBIOS. If MYNETBIOS does not exist, no entries are shown.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 205

206 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NetWare Aut Entries (WRKNTWAUTE)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with NetWare Authentication Entry (WRKNTWAUTE) command displays a list of
authentication entries for a user. From the Work with NetWare Authentication Entry panel, options are
available to add, change, display and remove authentication entries, as well as start authenticated
connections to servers using the authentication entries.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
SVRTYPE Server type *ALL, *NETWARE3, *NDS Optional
NDSTREE NDS tree Character value, *ALL Optional
SERVER Server Character value, *ALL Optional
USRPRF User profile Name, *CURRENT Optional

Top

Server type (SVRTYPE)

Specifies the type of the authentication entries to be viewed.
*ALL View all authentication entries for this user.
*NETWARE3
View all NetWare 3.x server authentication entries.
*NDS View all NetWare Directory Services tree authentication entries.
Top

NDS tree (NDSTREE)

Specifies, for server type *NDS, the name of the NetWare Directory Services tree authentication entries
with which to work.
*ALL View all NDS authentication entries for this user.
’name’ Specify the name of the NDS tree entries with which to work.
’generic-name’
Specify the generic name of the NDS tree entries with which to work. A generic name is a
character string of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The
asterisk substitutes for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that
begin with the generic prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with
the generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 207

Server (SERVER)
Specifies, for server type *NETWARE3, the server authentication entries you want to work with.
*ALL View all NetWare 3.12 server authentication entries for this user.
’name’ Specify the name of the server entry with which to work.
’generic-name’
Specify the generic name of the server entries with which to work. A generic name is a character
string of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk
substitutes for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin
with the generic prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the
generic (prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
Top

User profile (USRPRF)

Specifies the user profile containing the authentication entries.
*CURRENT
Use the current user profile.
name Specify the name of the user profile. The user profile must be the current user profile, or the user
must have *USE and *OBJMGT authority to the user profile, and *SECADM special authority.
Top

Examples
WRKNTWAUTE SVRTYPE(*NDS)

This command displays a list of all NetWare Directory Services tree authentication entries for the current
user.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2217
Not authorized to user profile &1.
Top

208 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NetWare Connections (WRKNTWCNN)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with NetWare Connections (WRKNTWCNN) command allows a user to work with active
NetWare connections. This command can be used to work with NetWare connections to do the following:
1. Display a list of connections originating from the local system started by a specific user to one or
more servers in the network.
2. Display a list of connections originating from the local system started by all users to one or more
servers in the network.
3. Display a list of all active NetWare connections for a specific NetWare server in the network
regardless of where the connection originated.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
SERVER Server Character value, *ALL Required,
Positional 1
CGY Category *LOCAL, *SERVER Optional
USRPRF User profile Simple name, *ALL, *CURRENT Optional

Top

Server (SERVER)
Specifies one or all NetWare servers whose connections are to be displayed.
*ALL Connections originating from the iSeries to all NetWare servers will be displayed.
character-value
Specify the name of an active server defined for the network.
Top

Category (CGY)
Specifies what category of NetWare connections to work with.
*LOCAL
Only those NetWare connections originating from the iSeries are displayed.
*SERVER
Specifies that connections to a particular NetWare server are displayed.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 209

User profile (USRPRF)
Specifies an iSeries user profile whose connections are to be worked with. Only those connections
originating from the local system are displayed. This parameter is ignored when CGY(*SERVER) is
specified.
*ALL NetWare connections started by all iSeries users on the system will be worked with.
*CURRENT
All NetWare connections started by the current user profile are worked with.
name Specify the name of an iSeries user profile whose connections are to be worked with.
Top

Examples
None
Top

Error messages
None
Top

210 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NetWare Volumes (WRKNTWVOL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with NetWare Volumes (WRKNTWVOL) command displays the Work with NetWare Volumes
display which lists the volumes for a server and allows the user to create, change, delete, display, and
print volumes. The ’change’ option on the Work with NetWare Volumes display is used to mount and
dismount volumes as well as increase the size of a volume.

Restrictions: You must have *IOSYSCFG special authority to use this command.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
SERVER Server Character value Required,
Positional 1
VOL Volume Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Server (SERVER)
Specifies the server for which volumes are listed. A server name must be specified.
Top

Volume (VOL)
Specifies the volume to be listed.
*ALL All volumes for the specified server are listed.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the volumes to be listed.
name Specify the name of the volume to be listed.
Top

Examples
WRKNTWVOL SERVER(SERVER1) VOL(ACCT*)

This command displays the Work with NetWare Volumes panel, showing a list of volumes for SERVER1.
Only those volumes whose name begins with the letters ’ACCT’ are shown.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 211

Error messages
None
Top

212 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Network Interfaces (WRKNWID)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Network Interface Descriptions (WRKNWID) command provides an interactive interface
to network interface description functions through the Work with Network Interface Descriptions display.
This command displays the Work with Network Interface Descriptions menu.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NWID Network interface Generic name, name, *ALL, *ATM, *FR, *ISDN, *T1 Optional,
description Positional 1

Top

Network interface description (NWID)

This is a required parameter.

Specifies the network interface descriptions to be worked with.

*ALL All network interface descriptions are worked with.
*ATM The user can work with asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) network interfaces.
*FR The user can work with frame relay network interfaces.
*ISDN
The user can work with integrated services digital network interfaces.
generic*-name
Specify the generic name of the network interface description to be worked with. A generic name
is a character string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic
name of a network interface description is specified, all network interface descriptions that have
names with the same prefix as the generic network interface description are worked with.
network-interface-name
Specify the name of the network interface description to be worked with.
Top

Examples
WRKNWID NWID(NET1)

This command displays the Work with Network Interface Descriptions panel with an entry for network
interface ’NET1’. If NET1 does not exist, no entries are displayed.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 213

Error messages
None
Top

214 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Network Servers (WRKNWSD)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Network Server Descriptions (WRKNWSD) command shows the Work with Network
Server Descriptions display, which provides an interactive interface to network server description
functions.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NWSD Network server description Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1

Top

Network server description (NWSD)

Specifies the network server descriptions to work with.
*ALL The user can work with all network server descriptions.
generic*-network-server-description-name
Specify the generic name of the network server description. A generic name is a character string
of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes
for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the
generic prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic
(prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
network-server-description-name
Specify the name of the network server description to work with.
Top

Examples
WRKNWSD NWSD(*ALL)

This command displays the Work with Network Server Descriptions panel with entries for all network
server descriptions. If no network server descriptions exist, no entries are shown.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 215

216 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NWS User Enrollment (WRKNWSENR)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Network Server User Enrollment (WRKNWSENR) command works with a list of user
profiles that the iSeries administration support has enrolled, or is currently enrolling, into the network.

The information displayed differs depending on the value of the SVRTYPE parameter.
1. If SVRTYPE(*NWSA) is specified, the display shown depends on the value specified for the
DFTSVRTYPE parameter in the network server attributes (CHGNWSA command). The DFTSVRTYPE
values that are supported are *NETWARE and *WINDOWSNT..
2. If SVRTYPE(*NWSUSRA) is specified, the display shown depends on the value specified for the
DFTSVRTYPE parameter in the network server user attributes (CHGNWSUSRA command) for the
current user. The value in the network server user attributes that are valid for this command are
*NETWARE and *WINDOWSNT.
3. If SVRTYPE(*NETWARE) is specified, the display works with enrollment information for those iSeries
users being enrolled into NetWare Directory Services trees.
4. If SVRTYPE(*WINDOWSNT) is specified, enrollment information is shown for iSeries users enrolled
into Windows domains and local servers.

In general, the Work with Network Server User Enrollment display shows a list of servers or NetWare
Directory Services trees and the current enrollment status for a list of iSeries profiles being enrolled into
each server or NetWare Directory Services tree.

Specific options are available to work with individual profiles in the list. These options provide functions
such as changing user profiles and changing network server user attributes.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
USRPRF User profile Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
PRFTYPE Profile type *USER, *GROUP Optional,
Positional 2
SVRTYPE Server type *NWSUSRA, *NWSA, *NETWARE, *WINDOWSNT Optional,
Positional 3
NDSTREE NDS tree Character value, *ALL, *NWSA, *NONE Optional
SERVER Server Character value, *ALL, *NWSA, *NONE Optional
DOMAIN Domain Character value, *ALL, *NWSA, *NONE Optional

Top

User profile (USRPRF)

Specifies the name of a profile.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 217

*ALL The enrollment status for all profiles is displayed.
generic*-user-name
Specify the generic name of the profile to be displayed. A generic name is a character string of
one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. If a generic name is
specified, then all users with names that begin with the generic name, and for which the user has
authority, are shown. If an asterisk is not included with the generic (prefix) name, the system
assumes it to be the complete user name.
profile-name
Specify the name of a profile to be displayed.
Top

Profile type (PRFTYPE)

Specifies which enrollment status should be displayed.
*USER
A list of iSeries users and their enrollment status is displayed. From this display an alternate view
is available which will show, for each user in this list, a list of iSeries groups the user belongs to,
provided the group is currently being enrolled into that server or NetWare Directory Services
tree.
*GROUP
A list of iSeries groups and their enrollment status is displayed. An alternate view is available to
display for each group in the list, those members of each group that are currently being enrolled
into the server or NetWare Directory Services tree.
Top

Server type (SVRTYPE)

Specifies which type of server to work with.
*NWSUSRA
The server type from the network server user attributes (CHGNWSUSRA command) for the user
profile running the WRKNWSENR command is used.
*NWSA
The server type in the network server attributes (CHGNWSA command) is used.
*NETWARE
The enrollment status for those profiles being enrolled into a NetWare network are displayed.
*WINDOWSNT
Specifies that a list of users and groups enrolled into Windows domains and local servers are
displayed.
Top

NDS tree (NDSTREE)

Specifies which NetWare Directory Services trees to work with.
*ALL All NetWare Directory Services trees that have users enrolled are listed.

218 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
*NWSA
The enrollment information for all the NetWare Directory Services trees identified by the
NDSTREELST parameter in the network server attributes are displayed.
*NONE
No enrollment information is listed for any NetWare Directory Services trees.
generic*-tree-name
Specify the generic name of NetWare Directory Services trees that have users enrolled.
’NDS tree-name’
Specify the name of a specific NetWare Directory Services tree that has users enrolled.
Top

Server (SERVER)
Specifies which network servers to work with.
*ALL All servers that have users enrolled are listed.
*NWSA
The enrollment information for all the servers identified in the network server attributes is
displayed.
For *WINDOWSNT servers, the enrollment information for all servers defined by the
WNTLCLSVRL parameter are displayed.
*NONE
No enrollment information is listed for any servers. This is valid only when
SVRTYPE(*NETWARE) is specified.
generic*-server-name
Specify the generic name of the server.
server-name
Specify the name of a specific server.
Top

Domain (DOMAIN)
Specifies which Windows domains to work with.
*ALL All domains that have users enrolled are listed.
*NWSA
The enrollment information for all the Windows domains identified by the WNTDMNLST
parameter in the system network server attributes are displayed.
*NONE
No enrollment information is listed for any Windows domains. Only the enrollment information
for local Windows servers is displayed based on the SERVER parameter.
generic*-domain-name
Specify the generic name of Windows domains that have users enrolled.
’domain-name’
Specify the name of a specific Windows domain that has users enrolled.
Top

Work with NWS User Enrollment (WRKNWSENR) 219

Examples
Example 1: Working with NetWare NDS Tree User Enrollment
WRKNWSENR SVRTYPE(*NETWARE) NDSTREE(TREE1) SERVER(*NONE)

This command displays a list of all OS/400 users that the OS/400 user enrollment support has enrolled
into NetWare Directory Services TREE1.

Example 2: Working with Windows NT User Enrollment

WRKNWSENR SVRTYPE(*WINDOWSNT) DOMAIN(DMN*) SERVER(SRV*)

This command displays a list of all OS/400 users that the OS/400 user enrollment support has enrolled
into all Windows NT domains whose name starts with ’DMN’ and all local servers that start with ’SRV’.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPFA45A
Network server users not displayed.
Top

220 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NWS Storage Spaces (WRKNWSSTG)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Network Server Storage Spaces (WRKNWSSTG) command works with network server
storage spaces using the Work with Network Server Storage Spaces display. There are options available to
create, delete, display, and print storage spaces. You can also add and remove links to network server
descriptions. The copy option can be chosen to create and copy an existing storage space into a newly
created one.

The Work with Network Server Storage Spaces display shows information about the format of the storage
spaces (*NTFS, *FAT, *FAT32, *NTFSQR, *OPEN), their size, the network server descriptions to which
they are linked (if any), the auxiliary storage pool they exist in, and, if linked, the drive sequence.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
NWSSTG Network server storage Generic name, name, *ALL Optional,
space Positional 1
NWSD Network server description Name Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Network server storage space (NWSSTG)

Specifies the name of the network server storage spaces listed.
*ALL All network server storage spaces listed.
generic*-network-server-storage-space
Specify the generic name of the network server storage space listed.
network-server-storage-space
Specify the name of the network server storage space listed.
Top

Network server description (NWSD)

Specifies the name of the network server description for which storage spaces are listed. When this
parameter is specified, only storage spaces linked to this network server description are shown.
Top

Examples
WRKNWSSTG NWSSTG(*ALL) SERVER(SERVER1)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 221

This command displays the Work with Network Server Storage Spaces panel, showing the list of storage
spaces linked to network server SERVER1.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

222 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with NWS Status (WRKNWSSTS)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Network Server Status (WRKNWSSTS) command displays a list of servers and their
current status. Specific options are available to work with individual servers in the list. These options
provide functions such as displaying active users, restarting a server, displaying statistics, and so on. The
display that appears differs depending on the value of the SVRTYPE parameter.
1. If SVRTYPE(*NWSUSRA) is specified, the display shown depends on the value specified for the
SVRTYPE parameter in the network server user attributes (CHGNWSUSRA command) for the current
user.
2. If SVRTYPE(*NWSA) is specified, the display shown depends on the value specified for the SVRTYPE
parameter in the network server attributes (CHGNWSA command).
3. If SVRTYPE(*NETWARE) or SVRTYPE(*NDS) is specified, the display shows options and information
relevant to NetWare servers. Only NetWare servers in NDS trees are listed.
4. If SVRTYPE(*WINDOWSNT) is specified, the display shows options and information relevant to local
NWSDs that were created as Windows servers.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
SERVER Server Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
SVRTYPE Server type *NWSUSRA, *NWSA, *WINDOWSNT, *NETWARE, Optional
*NDS

Top

Server (SERVER)
Specifies the name of a server.
*ALL All local servers and all remote ’active’ servers are displayed.
generic*-server-name
Specify the generic name of the server.
server-name
Specify the name of a specific server.
Top

Server type (SVRTYPE)

Specifies which type of server to work with. The Work with Network Server Status display lists either
NetWare servers, or Windows servers.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 223

*NWSUSRA
The type of servers to list is specified in the network server user attributes (CHGNWSUSRA
command).
*NWSA
The type of servers to list is specified in the network server attributes (CHGNWSA command).
*NETWARE or *NDS
A list of NetWare servers in the NetWare Directory Services (NDS) trees is displayed.
*WINDOWSNT
A list of Windows servers is displayed.
Top

Examples
WRKNWSSTS SERVER(SERVER1) SVRTYPE(*NETWARE)

This command displays the Work with Network Server Status panel for a NetWare server named
SERVER1.
WRKNWSSTS SERVER(SERVER2) SVRTYPE(*WINDOWSNT)

This command displays the Work with Network Server Status panel for a Windows NT server named
SERVER2.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPCA40E
Server &1 restarted.
CPFA451
Server name too long.
Top

224 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Objects (WRKOBJ)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Objects (WRKOBJ) command shows a list of objects from one or more libraries.

The object name, object type, library name, object attribute, and short text description for the object are
shown for each listed object. The data attributes and the actual data in the object are not shown. From
this list, several object-oriented options can be performed.

Restrictions:
v Only the libraries to which you have use (*USE) authority will be searched.
v Only the objects to which you have some authority will be shown on the display.
v To perform operations on the objects, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the
operation, and the appropriate authority to the objects on which the operation is to be performed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OBJ Object Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Object Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL
OBJTYPE Object type *ALL, *ALRTBL, *AUTL, *BNDDIR, *CFGL, *CHTFMT, Optional,
*CLD, *CLS, *CMD, *CNNL, *COSD, *CSI, *CSPMAP, Positional 2
*CSPTBL, *CTLD, *CRG, *CRQD, *DEVD, *DOC,
*DTAARA, *DTADCT, *DTAQ, *EDTD, *EXITRG, *FCT,
*FILE, *FLR, *FNTTBL, *FNTRSC, *FORMDF, *FTR, *GSS,
*IGCDCT, *IGCSRT, *IGCTBL, *IMGCLG, *IPXD, *JOBD,
*JOBQ, *JOBSCD, *JRN, *JRNRCV, *LIB, *LIND,
*LOCALE, *MEDDFN, *MENU, *MODD, *MODULE,
*MSGF, *MSGQ, *MGTCOL, *M36, *M36CFG, *NODL,
*NODGRP, *NWID, *OUTQ, *NWSD, *NTBD, *OVL,
*PAGDFN, *PAGSEG, *PDFMAP, *PDG, *PGM, *PNLGRP,
*PRDAVL, *PRDDFN, *PRDLOD, *PSFCFG, *QMFORM,
*QMQRY, *QRYDFN, *RCT, *SBSD, *SCHIDX, *SPADCT,
*SQLPKG, *SQLUDT, *SRVPGM, *SVRSTG, *SSND, *S36,
*TBL, *USRIDX, *TIMZON, *USRPRF, *USRQ, *USRSPC,
*VLDL, *WSCST

Top

Object (OBJ)
Specifies the objects to be shown on the Work with Objects display.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier 1: Object

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 225

*ALL All objects of the object types specified for the Object type (OBJTYPE) parameter.
generic-name
Specify the generic name of the object to be shown. A generic name is a character string that
contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name is specified, all
objects that have names with the same prefix as the generic name are shown.
name Specify the name of the object to be shown.

Qualifier 2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for
the thread, the QGPL library is searched.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
name Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Object type (OBJTYPE)

Specifies the object type for objects to be shown.
*ALL All objects are shown that have an object name that matches the value specified for the Object
(OBJ) parameter.

226 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
object-type
Specify the object type for objects to be listed, such as command (*CMD), file (*FILE), or program
(*PGM). To see a complete list of object types when prompting this command, position the cursor
on the field for this parameter and press F4 (Prompt).
Top

Examples
WRKOBJ OBJ(X/PAY) OBJTYPE(*ALL)

This command displays the Work with Objects panel, showing all objects for which you authority whose
names begin with the letters ’PAY’ and are located in library X.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
CPF9810
Library &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
Top

Work with Objects (WRKOBJ) 227

228 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) command allows you to work with the object lock requests
in the system for a specified object. You can work with both held locks and locks waiting to be applied.

Restrictions:
1. The user must have *EXECUTE authority to the library containing the object and to the ASP device
description. Otherwise, the user must have *JOBCTL special authority.
2. This command does not show record locks for database files.
3. Work station message queues cannot be allocated, and therefore, they will not have any locks. A work
station message queue is associated with a work station device description of the same name.
Therefore, to determine why an operation that requires the work station message queue to be
allocated does not work, the user should see if there are any locks on the device description of the
same name.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OBJ Object Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Object Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
OBJTYPE Object type *ALRTBL, *AUTL, *BNDDIR, *CFGL, *CHTFMT, *CLD, Required,
*CLS, *CMD, *CNNL, *COSD, *CRG, *CRQD, *CSI, Positional 2
*CSPMAP, *CSPTBL, *CTLD, *DEVD, *DOC, *DTAARA,
*DTADCT, *DTAQ, *EDTD, *EXITRG, *FCT, *FILE, *FLR,
*FNTRSC, *FNTTBL, *FORMDF, *FTR, *GSS, *IGCDCT,
*IGCSRT, *IGCTBL, *IMGCLG, *IPXD, *JOBD, *JOBQ,
*JOBSCD, *JRN, *JRNRCV, *LIB, *LIND, *LOCALE,
*MEDDFN, *MENU, *MGTCOL, *MODD, *MODULE,
*MSGF, *MSGQ, *M36, *M36CFG, *NODL, *NTBD,
*NWID, *NWSD, *OUTQ, *OVL, *PAGDFN, *PAGSEG,
*PDFMAP, *PDG, *PGM, *PNLGRP, *PRDAVL, *PRDDFN,
*PRDLOD, *PSFCFG, *QMFORM, *QMQRY, *QRYDFN,
*SBSD, *SCHIDX, *SPADCT, *SQLPKG, *SQLUDT,
*SRVPGM, *SSND, *S36, *TBL, *TIMZON, *USRIDX,
*USRPRF, *USRQ, *USRSPC, *VLDL, *WSCST
MBR Member Name, *NONE, *FIRST, *ALL Optional,
Positional 3
ASPDEV ASP device Name, *, *SYSBAS Optional
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 229

Object (OBJ)
Specifies the name and library of the object for which locks are being displayed.

This is a required parameter.

Qualifier1: Object
name Specify the name of the object.

Qualifier2: Library
*LIBL All libraries in the thread’s library list are searched until a match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the thread is used to locate the object. If no library is specified as the
current library for the thread, the QGPL library is used.
name Specify the name of the library where the object is located.

If a file member is specified for a file, and the file’s library value is *LIBL, the first occurrence of the file
in the thread’s library search list is searched for the member. For object types that exist only in library
QSYS (for example, *DEVD), QSYS and *LIBL are the only library names that are accepted. When
specifying a value other than * for the ASP device (ASPDEV), *LIBL can not be specified.
Top

Object type (OBJTYPE)

Specifies the object type of the object for which locks are being displayed. Specify the predefined value
that identifies the object type.

This is a required parameter.

Object-type
Specify the object type. Refer to the Object type (OBJTYPE) parameter of the Work with Objects
(WRKOBJ) command for more information.
Top

Member (MBR)
Specifies the member name of a database file. This parameter is valid only when a database file has been
specified for the Object (OBJ) parameter.
*NONE
No member locks are displayed, but file level locks are displayed. (The display of member locks
for all the members in the file can be requested from the file locks display.)
*FIRST
The first member in the named database file is displayed.
*ALL Member locks for all the members in the database file are displayed.
name Specify the name of the database file member for which locks are displayed.
Top

230 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
ASP device (ASPDEV)
Specifies the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device name where the library that contains the object
(specified for the Object (OBJ) parameter) is located. If the object’s library resides in an ASP that is not
part of the library name space associated with the thread, this parameter must be specified to ensure the
correct object is used as the target of the operation.
* The ASPs that are currently part of the thread’s library name space will be searched to locate the
object. This includes the system ASP (ASP number 1), all configured basic user ASPs (ASP
numbers 2-32), and, if the thread has an ASP group, all independent ASPs in the ASP group.
*SYSBAS
The system ASP and all basic user ASPs will be searched to locate the object. No independent
ASPs will be searched, even if the thread has an ASP group.
name The device name of the independent ASP to be searched to locate the object. The independent
ASP must have been activated (by varying on the ASP device) and have a status of ’Active’ or
’Available’. The system ASP and basic user ASPs will not be searched.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output.
* The output is displayed for interactive jobs or printed with the job’s spooled output for
non-interactive jobs.
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Printing Object Lock Information for a File
WRKOBJLCK OBJ(*LIBL/LOCKEDFILE) OBJTYPE(*FILE)
MBR(LOCKEDMBR) OUTPUT(*PRINT)

This command prints the lock information for the member named LOCKEDMBR in the file named
LOCKEDFILE. The file is located using the library list.

Example 2: Working With Object Locks for a Library on an Independent ASP

WRKOBJLCK OBJ(QSYS/LIBNAME) OBJTYPE(*LIB) ASPDEV(PRODXX)

This command allows you to work with the lock information for the library LIBNAME located on the
independent auxiliary storage pool (ASP) device PRODXX.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPFB8ED
Device description &1 not correct for operation.

Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) 231

CPF0919
Library in library list damaged.
CPF0924
Cannot use library in library list.
CPF0935
Cannot use member name for object type *&2.
CPF0939
Object &3 type &2 was not found in library &4.
CPF0948
Member &1 file &3 in library &4 not found.
CPF095B
Value for ASPDEV not valid with special value for library.
CPF0950
&2 &3 in library &4 not found.
CPF0951
QSYS only valid library for object type &2.
CPF0952
Library &4 not found for &2 &3.
CPF0953
Library in library list previously deleted.
CPF0958
&2 &3 in library &4 saved with storage freed.
CPF0988
Library &4 damaged.
CPF1093
Override of file device type not valid.
CPF3285
Damage found on file &1 in library &3.
CPF9803
Cannot allocate object &2 in library &3.
CPF9804
Object &2 in library &3 damaged.
CPF9814
Device &1 not found.
CPF9820
Not authorized to use library &1.
CPF9825
Not authorized to device &1.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9847
Error occurred while closing file &1 in library &2.

232 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPF9850
Override of printer file &1 not allowed.
CPF9851
Overflow value for file &1 in &2 too small.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) 233

234 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) command is used to manage objects for any user
profile. This command displays objects owned by a user profile and performs the following:
v Edit object authority
v Delete the object
v Display object authority
v Rename the object
v Display the object’s description
v Change the ownership of the object

Restrictions: You must have read (*READ) authority to the specified user profile.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
USRPRF User profile Name, *CURRENT Optional,
Positional 1

Top

User profile (USRPRF)

Specifies the user profile whose owned objects are to be shown.
*CURRENT
Objects owned by the user profile that is running the WRKOBJOWN command are shown.
name Specify the name of the user profile whose owned objects are to be shown.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Working With Objects Owned by the Current User Profile
WRKOBJOWN USRPRF(*CURRENT)

This command displays the Work with Objects by Owner panel, showing a list of the objects owned by
the user running this command.

Example 2: Working With Objects Owned by a User Profile

WRKOBJOWN USRPRF(BARTH)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 235

This command displays the Work with Objects by Owner panel, showing a list of the objects owned by
user profile BARTH.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPFA0AB
Operation failed for object. Object is &1.
CPFA1BF
Object &1 is not accessible.
CPFA1C0
Object &1 is not accessible.
CPF2204
User profile &1 not found.
CPF2213
Not able to allocate user profile &1.
CPF2217
Not authorized to user profile &1.
Top

236 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work Objects by Primary Group (WRKOBJPGP)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Objects by Primary Group (WRKOBJPGP) command is used to manage objects for which
a user is the primary group. This command displays objects for which a user is the primary group and
performs the following:
v Edit object authority
v Delete the object
v Display object authority
v Rename the object
v Display the object’s description
v Change the primary group of the object

Restriction: You must have read authority to the profile being displayed.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
PGP Primary group Name Required,
Positional 1

Top

Primary group (PGP)

This is a required parameter.

The name of the group profile whose objects are being worked with.
Top

Examples
WRKOBJPGP PGP(GROUP01)

This command displays the Work with Objects by Primary Group panel, showing a list of the objects for
which group profile GROUP01 is the primary group.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 237

CPF2204
User profile &1 not found.
CPF2213
Not able to allocate user profile &1.
CPF2217
Not authorized to user profile &1.
Top

238 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with OptiConnect Activity (WRKOPCACT)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with OptiConnect Activity (WRKOPCACT) command allows you to view information about
database transactions, fiber optic bus activity, and connection status for client and server systems. When
this command is run, three views of the Work with OptiConnect Activity display are available.

Options are available from the Work with OptiConnect Activity display to vary on or vary off systems or
resources in the multisystem fiber optic network.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKOPCACT

This command shows the Work with OptiConnect Activity panel.

Top

Error messages
Unknown
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 239

240 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Optical Directories (WRKOPTDIR)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Optical Directories (WRKOPTDIR) command displays a list of optical directories and
provides options to create, to copy, to delete, and to display or print a list of directories and their
attributes. This command also allows you to work with files in the directories.

Restrictions:
1. To use this command you must have at least *USE authority to the authorization list securing the
volumes containing the optical directories.
2. You must have *CHANGE authority to create, copy, or delete optical directories.
3. If this command is issued for a directory on an optical volume which is in a remote optical server,
only the following can be specified:
v DIR(optical-directory-name)
v VOL(volume-identifier)
v SORT(*DIR)
v SLTLVL(1).
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DIR Optical directory Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
VOL Volume identifier Character value, *ALL Optional,
Positional 2
SORT Sort by *DATE, *DIR Optional,
Positional 3
SLTLVL Select directory level Integer, 1, *ALL Optional
STRDATE Starting date Date, *AVAIL Optional

Top

Optical directory (DIR)

Specifies the optical directories to be listed.
*ALL All directories in the specified optical volume are listed.
optical-directory-name
Specify the name of a directory.
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 241

Volume identifier (VOL)
Specifies the identifier of the volume that contains the directories specified on the DIR parameter.
*ALL Optical volumes in direct-attached optical devices are listed.
volume-identifier
Specify the volume identifier of the volume to search.
Top

Sort by (SORT)
Specifies how the output for each volume is sorted.

Note: If the optical volume was initialized as a backup volume, this parameter is ignored.
*DATE
The output list is sorted in order by the date that the volume was created, beginning with the
most recent date.
*DIR The output list is sorted in alphabetical order by directory name.
Top

Select directory level (SLTLVL)

Specifies the number of levels of the directory structure to include in the list when SORT(*DIR) is
specified.

Note: If the optical volume was initialized as a backup volume, this parameter is ignored.
1 Only first level directories are listed.
*ALL All directories are listed.
select-directory-level
Specify the number of subdirectory levels for the specified directory. Valid values range from 1
through 32767.
Top

Starting date (STRDATE)

Specifies the starting date for the list when SORT(*DATE) is specified. Only directories created on or
before the starting date are listed.

Note: If the optical volume was initialized as a backup volume, this parameter is ignored.
*AVAIL
The directories created on all available dates are included in the output list.
starting-date
Specify the starting date.
Top

242 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Examples
WRKOPTDIR VOL(VOL01)

This command displays the Work with Optical Directories panel, showing a list of all optical directories
on the volume VOL01 sorted by the date they were created.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
OPT1205
Directory not found.
OPT1215
Directory cannot be deleted.
OPT1317
Directory name is too long.
OPT1320
Optical volume &1 in use.
OPT1325
Optical volume format not recognized.
OPT1331
Optical volume &1 not found.
OPT1340
Optical volume &1 not initialized.
OPT1805
Error accessing optical volume index file.
OPT1810
Error accessing optical directory index file.
OPT1815
Internal program error occurred.
OPT2301
Internal system object in use.

*STATUS Messages
OPT1937
Unable to display all requested files.
Top

Work with Optical Directories (WRKOPTDIR) 243

244 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Optical Files (WRKOPTF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Optical Files (WRKOPTF) command displays a list of optical files on the system and
provides options to copy, to delete, to rename and to display or print a list of optical files and their
attributes.

Restrictions:
1. To use this command you must have *USE authority to the authorization list securing the volume
containing the optical files.
2. If this command is issued for an optical volume which is in a remote optical server, only the
following can be specified:
v DIR(optical-directory-name)
v FILE(*ALL)
v FILE(file-name)
v FILE(generic*-file-name)
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
VOL Volume identifier Character value Required,
Positional 1
DIR Directory Character value, *ALL Required,
Positional 2
FILE File Character value, *SELECT, *ALL Optional,
Positional 3
SLTFILE Select files Element list Optional
Element 1: From file Character value, *ALL
Element 2: To file Character value
SLTDATE Select date Element list Optional
Element 1: Date type *CREATED, *MODIFIED
Element 2: Starting date and Element list
time
Element 1: Starting time Time, *AVAIL
Element 2: Starting date Date, *BEGIN
Element 3: Ending date and Element list
time
Element 1: Ending time Time, *AVAIL
Element 2: Ending date Date, *END

Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 245

Volume identifier (VOL)
Specifies the identifier of the optical volume that contains the files to be listed.
Top

Directory (DIR)
Specifies the optical directory that contains the files specified to be listed, beginning with the root
directory of the volume.

This is a required parameter.

*ALL All directories on the specified optical volume are listed. If DIR(*ALL) is specified, only optical
files contained in the root directory are listed.
directory-name
Specify the name of a directory.
Top

File (FILE)
Specifies the file or files to be listed.
*ALL All files in the specified directory are listed.
*SELECT
The files in the range specified on the SLTFILE parameter are listed.
Note: This value is ignored for volumes in remote optical servers.
file-name
Specify the name of a file.
generic*-file-name
Specify the generic name of the file you want to work with. A generic name is a character string
of one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*); for example, ABC*. The asterisk substitutes
for any valid characters. A generic name specifies all objects with names that begin with the
generic prefix for which the user has authority. If an asterisk is not included with the generic
(prefix) name, the system assumes it to be the complete object name.
Top

Select files (SLTFILE)

Specifies the range of files to be listed.

Notes:
1. This parameter is valid only if FILE(*SELECT) is specified and is ignored if the optical volume was
initialized as a backup volume.
2. This parameter is not valid for remote optical servers.

Element 1: From file

*ALL All files in the specified directory are selected.

246 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
from-file
Specify the name of the first file in the name range to be selected.
generic*-file-name
Specify the generic name of the optical files to be selected.

Element 2: To file
to-file Specify the name of the last file in the name range.
Note: This value is ignored when the from-file value is *ALL or generic*.
Top

Select date (SLTDATE)

Specifies the date and the time range of the files to be selected.

Notes:
1. This parameter is valid only if FILE(*SELECT) is specified and is ignored if the optical volume was
initialized as a backup volume.
2. This parameter is not valid for remote optical servers.

Element 1: Date type

*CREATED
The files are selected by the dates on which they were created.
*MODIFIED
The files are selected by the dates on which they were changed.

Element 2: Starting date and time

Element 1: Starting time

*AVAIL
The time range includes all possible times before the end time.
start-time
Specify the earliest time in the time range.

Element 2: Starting date

*BEGIN
The date of the oldest file is the starting date.
start-date
Specify the earliest date in the date range.

Element 3: Ending date and time

Element 1: Ending time

Work with Optical Files (WRKOPTF) 247

 *AVAIL
The time range includes all times after the starting time.
end-time
Specify the last time in the time range.

Element 2: Ending date

*END The date of the newest file is the ending date.
end-date
Specify the last date in the date range.

Top

Examples
Example 1: Displaying Optical Files in a Root Directory
WRKOPTF VOL(VOL01) DIR(*ALL)

This command displays a list of all optical files in the root directory on the optical volume VOL01.

Example 2: Displaying Optical Files in a Specific Directory

WRKOPTF VOL(VOL02) DIR(’/DIR1’) FILE(*ALL)

This command displays a list of all optical files in the directory DIR1 on the optical volume VOL02.

Example 3: Displaying Optical Files Created on Specific Dates

WRKOPTF VOL(VOL03) DIR(’/DIR2’)
FILE(*SELECT) SLTFILE(*ALL)
SLTDATE(*CREATED (’12:01:00’ ’1/1/94’)
(’23:59:59’ ’12/31/94’))

This command displays a list of all optical files in the directory DIR2 on the volume VOL03 created
between 12:01:00 on January 1, 1994 and 23:59:59 on December 31, 1994.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
OPT0159
Beginning selection is greater then ending selection.
OPT1115
File not found.
OPT1205
Directory not found.
OPT1212
Directory in use.

248 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
OPT1220
File or directory name already exists.
OPT1224
Path length exceeds the maximum of 256 bytes.
OPT1317
Directory name is too long.
OPT1320
Optical volume &1 in use.
OPT1325
Optical volume format not recognized.
OPT1330
Optical volume not found or not useable.
OPT1331
Optical volume &1 not found.
OPT1340
Optical volume &1 not initialized.
OPT1360
Media directory corrupted on optical volume &1.
OPT1460
Optical volume &1 is not in an optical device.
OPT1463
Operation not completed, optical volume is not a primary volume.
OPT1489
Volume parameter is not permitted for device &1.
OPT1530
&1 does not represent a valid optical device.
OPT1555
Optical device &1 in use.
OPT1605
Media or device error occurred.
OPT1640
Error occurred reading files or directories.
OPT1790
Operation not allowed or conflicts with another request.
OPT1805
Error accessing optical volume index file.
OPT1810
Error accessing optical directory index file.
OPT1815
Internal program error occurred.
OPT1820
Internal error occurred on optical device &1.
OPT1821
Error occurred on optical device &1.

Work with Optical Files (WRKOPTF) 249

OPT1825
Optical indexes are incorrect for optical device &1.
OPT1860
Request to optical device &1 failed.
OPT1861
No device description configured for resource &1.
OPT1862
No active device description for resource &1.
OPT1863
Optical libraries need to be reclaimed.
OPT1872
Optical request timed out or was cancelled.
OPT2301
Internal system object in use.
OPT7740
User not authorized to object &2 in library &3 type &4.
Top

250 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Optical Volumes (WRKOPTVOL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Optical Volumes (WRKOPTVOL) command displays a list of optical volumes and
provides options to:
v add an optical cartridge
v remove an optical cartridge
v change optical volume attributes
v display optical volume attributes
v print optical volume attributes
v copy a volume
v initialize a volume
v rename a volume
v delete a volume entry
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
DEV Optical device Name, *ALL Optional,
Positional 1
VOL Volume identifier Character value, *ALL, *BACKUP, *INDRIVE, *REMOVED Optional,
Positional 2
CSI Side information Character value, *ALL, *NONE Optional
RTVEXTINFO Retrieve extended *NO, *YES Optional
information

Top

Optical device (DEV)

Specifies the optical device from which the volumes are listed.
*ALL The volumes in all optical devices are listed.
optical-device-name
Specify the name of an optical device from which the volumes are listed.
Top

Volume identifier (VOL)

Specifies the optical volume identifiers which are listed.
*ALL All optical volume identifiers in the specified optical devices are listed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 251

*BACKUP
The optical volumes in the specified optical devices whose type is backup are listed.
*INDRIVE
Only the volumes which are currently in a drive for the specified optical device are listed.
*REMOVED
The volumes removed from optical libraries but whose information was kept in the optical index
database files are listed.
volume-identifier
Specify the identifier of a specific volume to be listed.
Top

Side information (CSI)

Specifies the communications side information objects representing the optical servers in the optical
configuration from which the volumes are listed. This parameter is valid only when DEV(*ALL) is
specified.
*ALL The names of volumes for all remote optical servers are listed.
*NONE
No volumes are listed for remote optical servers.
communications-side-information-object-name
Specify the name of the communications side information object representing the optical server
for which volumes are listed.
Top

Retrieve extended information (RTVEXTINFO)

Specifies whether extended volume information, such as location of the volume and the percentage of the
volume used, is retrieved.
*NO No extended volume information is retrieved.
*YES The extended volume information is retrieved.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Displaying Optical Volumes in an Optical Device
WRKOPTVOL DEV(OPT01)

This command displays the Work with Optical Volumes panel, showing a list of all optical volumes in the
optical device OPT01.

Example 2: Displaying Optical Volumes in a Remote Server

WRKOPTVOL DEV(*ALL) VOL(*ALL) CSI(LAN01)

This command displays the Work with Optical Volumes panel, showing a list of all optical volumes in the
optical server LAN01.
Top

252 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
OPT1530
&1 does not represent a valid optical device.
OPT1805
Error accessing optical volume index file.
OPT1815
Internal program error occurred.
OPT1860
Request to optical device &1 failed.
OPT2301
Internal system object in use.
Top

Work with Optical Volumes (WRKOPTVOL) 253

254 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Order Information (WRKORDINF)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Order Information (WRKORDINF) command lets you:

v automatically create an order information file for the system each time the command is run
v copy the order information files to selected media
v copy the order information files from selected media
v send order information files for this or any other AS/400 system to IBM

Restrictions:
1. To use this command, you must be signed on as QSYSOPR or QSRV, or have *ALLOBJ authority.
2. This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKORDINF

This command displays the Work with Order Information menu.

Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 255

256 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Order Requests (WRKORDRQS)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Order Requests (WRKORDRQS) command manages the order log on the AS/400. The
order assistance requests are created with the Request Order Assistance (RQSORDAST) command and
logged in the order log. Using the WRKORDRQS command you can display, send, answer, delete, and
print order assistance requests.

Within an APPN network, the WRKORDRQS command sends and answers order assistance requests to
other AS/400 systems.

There are no parameters for this command.

Top

Parameters
None
Top

Examples
WRKORDRQS

This command displays the Work with Order Requests panel, showing the list of previously submitted
order assistance requests. The first item in the list is the most recently updated item.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 257

258 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Output Queue (WRKOUTQ)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Output Queues (WRKOUTQ) command allows the user to display and work with either
the overall status of all output queues or all output queues that match the qualified generic name
specified and to which the user is authorized, or the detailed status of a specific output queue. The status
of the queues may change while the command is being run.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OUTQ Output queue Single values: *ALL Optional,
Other values: Qualified object name Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Output queue Generic name, name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *ALL
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Output queue (OUTQ)

Specifies either that the status of all output queues or all output queues that match the qualified generic
name specified is shown, or specifies the qualified name of a single output queue for which the status is
shown.

Note: When a generic output queue name is specified and qualified with a library name, the overall
status of all output queues that match the generic name is shown even if there is only one output queue
that matches the generic name.

The possible values are:

*ALL A list of all output queues is displayed with information about each output queue. If *ALL is
specified, no value can be specified for a library name because *ALL provides a list of all output
queues in every library on the system.
output-queue-name
Specify the name of the output queue whose detailed status information is to be displayed. A list
of all spooled files on the output queue is displayed with information about each spooled file.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the output queue.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 259

library-name
Specify the library where the output queue is located.

Note: When *ALL is specified for the library, the overall status of the output queues is shown even if
only one output queue is found.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or is printed
with the job’s spooled output on a printer.

The possible values are:

* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output on a printer.
Top

Examples
Example 1: Working with Status Information for Specific Output Queue
WRKOUTQ OUTQ(QGPL/QPRINT)

This command displays the Work with Output Queue panel for output queue QPRINT in library QGPL.
Each spooled file on the QPRINT output queue is shown.

Example 2: Searching for Output Queues Using a Generic Name

WRKOUTQ OUTQ(QGPL/QPRI*)

This command displays the Work with All Output Queues panel, showing a list of all output queues
whose names start with the letters ’QPRI’ and exist in the QGPL library.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2207
Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.
CPF3302
Override of print file &1 to file &2 not valid.
CPF3330
Necessary resource not available.
CPF3357
Output queue &1 in library &2 not found.
CPF7D41
Error occurred while logging order assistance request.

260 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
CPF7D42
Error occurred while performing database operation.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

Work with Output Queue (WRKOUTQ) 261

262 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with OUTQ Description (WRKOUTQD)
Where allowed to run: All environments (*ALL) Parameters
Threadsafe: No Examples
Error messages

The Work with Output Queue Description (WRKOUTQD) command shows the description of the
specified output queue. The description of the queue may change while the command is being run.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OUTQ Output queue Qualified object name Required,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Output queue Name
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
OUTPUT Output *, *PRINT Optional,
Positional 2

Top

Output queue (OUTQ)

This is a required parameter.

Specifies the name of the output queue whose description is to be displayed.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched until the first match is found.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is used to locate the output queue.
library-name
Specify the library where the output queue is located.
output-queue-name
Specify the name of the output queue whose description is displayed.
Top

Output (OUTPUT)
Specifies whether the output from the command is displayed at the requesting work station or printed
with the job’s spooled output on a printer.
* The output is displayed (if requested by an interactive job) or printed with the job’s spooled
output (if requested by a batch job).
*PRINT
The output is printed with the job’s spooled output on a printer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 263

 Top

Examples
WRKOUTQD OUTQ(QGPL/QPRINT)

This command displays the Work with Output Queue Description panel for the output queue named
QPRINT which is in the QGPL library.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF2150
Object information function failed.
CPF2151
Operation failed for &2 in &1 type *&3.
CPF2207
Not authorized to use object &1 in library &3 type *&2.
CPF3302
Override of print file &1 to file &2 not valid.
CPF3330
Necessary resource not available.
CPF3357
Output queue &1 in library &2 not found.
CPF7D41
Error occurred while logging order assistance request.
CPF7D42
Error occurred while performing database operation.
CPF9845
Error occurred while opening file &1.
CPF9846
Error while processing file &1 in library &2.
CPF9871
Error occurred while processing.
Top

264 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Overlays (WRKOVL)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work with Overlays (WRKOVL) command allows you to work with all of the overlay space objects
from the system or user libraries (or both).
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
OVL Overlay Qualified object name Optional,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Overlay Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Overlay (OVL)
Specifies the name and library of the overlay to work with. A specific overlay or a generic overlay can be
specified. Either type can be optionally qualified by a library name.

This is a required parameter.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*CURLIB
The current library for the job is searched for overlays to work with. If no library is specified as
the current library for the job, QGPL is used.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 265

 QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
library-name
Specify a library name. Only the library named in this parameter is searched for overlays to work
with.

The possible values are:

*ALL All overlays are worked with.
overlay-name
Specify the name of the overlay to work with.
generic*-overlay-name
Specify the generic name of the overlay to work with. A generic name can be specified as a
character string that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*). If a generic name
is specified, all overlays that have names with the same prefix as the generic overlay name are
worked with.
Top

Examples
WRKOVL OVL(*LIBL/OV*)

This command searches the library list to find the overlay objects whose names begin with the letters
’OV’. All overlay objects with names beginning with ’OV’ are shown on the Work with Overlays panel. If
no overlay objects beginning with ’OV’ exist in the library list, the WRKOVL display is shown with a
message indicating that an object matching the specified name cannot be found.
Top

Error messages
*ESCAPE Messages
CPF9809
Library &1 cannot be accessed.
Top

266 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Work with Page Definitions (WRKPAGDFN)
Where allowed to run: Interactive environments (*INTERACT Parameters
*IPGM *IREXX *EXEC) Examples
Threadsafe: No Error messages

The Work With Page Definitions (WRKPAGDFN) command displays a list of page definitions. From the
display, you can create or delete a page definition, display the name and attributes of a page definition,
or change the description of a page definition.
Top

Parameters
Keyword Description Choices Notes
PAGDFN Page definition Qualified object name Optional,
Positional 1
Qualifier 1: Page definition Generic name, name, *ALL
Qualifier 2: Library Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, *ALL

Top

Page definition (PAGDFN)

Specifies the name and library of the page definition to be listed on the Work with Page Definitions
display. Only those page definitions for which you have *READ authority are shown.

This is a required parameter.

The possible page definition values are:

*ALL All page definitions are listed.
generic*-page-definition-name
Specify the generic name of the page definitions to be listed. A generic name is a character string
that contains one or more characters followed by an asterisk (*).
page-definition-name
Specify the name of the page definition. If *LIBL or *USRLIBL is specified as the library name,
only the first page definition found with the specified name is listed.

The possible library values are:

*LIBL All libraries in the library list for the current thread are searched. All objects in these libraries
with the specified object name are shown.
*USRLIBL
If a current library entry exists in the library list for the current thread, the current library and the
libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched. If there is no current library entry,
only the libraries in the user portion of the library list are searched.
*CURLIB
Only the current library is searched. If no current library entry exists in the library list, QGPL is
used.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 267

*ALL All libraries in the system, including QSYS, are searched.
*ALLUSR
All user libraries are searched. All libraries with names that do not begin with the letter Q are
searched except for the following:
#CGULIB #DSULIB #SEULIB
#COBLIB #RPGLIB
#DFULIB #SDALIB
Although the following Qxxx libraries are provided by IBM, they typically contain user data that
changes frequently. Therefore, these libraries are considered user libraries and are also searched:
QDSNX QRCLxxxxx QUSRIJS QUSRVxRxMx
QGPL QSRVAGT QUSRINFSKR
QGPL38 QSYS2 QUSRNOTES
QMGTC QSYS2xxxxx QUSROND
QMGTC2 QS36F QUSRPOSGS
QMPGDATA QUSER38 QUSRPOSSA
QMQMDATA QUSRADSM QUSRPYMSVR
QMQMPROC QUSRBRM QUSRRDARS
QPFRDATA QUSRDIRCL QUSRSYS
QRCL QUSRDIRDB QUSRVI
1. ’xxxxx’ is the number of a primary auxiliary storage pool (ASP).
2. A different library name, in the format QUSRVxRxMx, can be created by the user for each
previous release supported by IBM to contain any user commands to be compiled in a CL
program for the previous release. For the QUSRVxRxMx user library, VxRxMx is the version,
release, and modification level of a previous release that IBM continues to support.
library-name
Specify the name of the library to be searched.
Top

Examples
WRKPAGDFN PAGDFN(*CURLIB/P1DFLT)

This command searches the current library for the page definition P1DFLT. If P1DFLT does not exist, the
Work with Page Definitions display shows a message indicating that an object matching the specified
name cannot be found.
Top

Error messages
None
Top

268 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
Appendix. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.
Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in
your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that
only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is
the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or
service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send
license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
500 Columbus Avenue
Thornwood, NY8809
U.S.A.

For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property
Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
Licensing
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106, Japan

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some
states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this
statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in
any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of
the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Corporation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1998, 2004 269

Software Interoperability Coordinator, Department 49XA
3605 Highway 52 N
Rochester, MN 55901
U.S.A.

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases,
payment of a fee.

The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material available for it are provided
by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement, or
any equivalent agreement between us.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and
cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM
products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of
those products.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate
them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and
products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an
actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs
in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing
application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for
which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all
conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these
programs. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application programs conforming
to IBM’s application programming interfaces.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:

Advanced Function Printing

AFP
AS/400
CICS
COBOL/400
C/400
DataPropagator
DB2
IBM
Infoprint
InfoWindow
iSeries
LPDA
OfficeVision

270 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)
OS/400
Print Services Facility
RPG/400
SystemView
System/36
TCS
WebSphere

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other
countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Terms and conditions for downloading and printing publications

Permissions for the use of the publications you have selected for download are granted subject to the
following terms and conditions and your indication of acceptance thereof.

Personal Use: You may reproduce these Publications for your personal, noncommercial use provided that
all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not distribute, display or make derivative works of these
Publications, or any portion thereof, without the express consent of IBM.

Commercial Use: You may reproduce, distribute and display these Publications solely within your
enterprise provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not make derivative works of
these Publications, or reproduce, distribute or display these Publications or any portion thereof outside
your enterprise, without the express consent of IBM.

Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or rights are granted, either
express or implied, to the Publications or any information, data, software or other intellectual property
contained therein.

IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its discretion, the use of
the Publications is detrimental to its interest or, as determined by IBM, the above instructions are not
being properly followed.

You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including all United States export laws and regulations. IBM MAKES NO
GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE PUBLICATIONS. THE PUBLICATIONS ARE
PROVIDED ″AS-IS″ AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

All material copyrighted by IBM Corporation.

By downloading or printing a publication from this site, you have indicated your agreement with these
terms and conditions.

Code disclaimer information

This document contains programming examples.

Appendix. Notices 271

IBM grants you a nonexclusive copyright license to use all programming code examples from which you
can generate similar function tailored to your own specific needs.

All sample code is provided by IBM for illustrative purposes only. These examples have not been
thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability,
or function of these programs.

All programs contained herein are provided to you ″AS IS″ without any warranties of any kind. The
implied warranties of non-infringement, merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are expressly
disclaimed.

272 iSeries: Operating System/400 Commands Starting with WRKAUT (Work with Authority)



Printed in USA